DataSonde 4 and MiniSondeweb.mit.edu/1.75/www/FieldTrips/Series_4a_Manual.pdfDataSonde ® 4 / MiniSonde User’s Manual Revision E 11 Conventions This manual follows a number of conventions

DataSonde® 4and MiniSonde®

Water Quality Multiprobes

User’s Manual

HYDROLAB CORPORATION12921 Burnet Rd. Austin, TX 78727

Phone (512) 255-8841 or 800-949-3766 • FAX (512) 255-3106

This User’s Manual contains trade secrets and confidential information which are proprietary to Hydrolab Corporation. Its use,reproduction, or disclosure in whole or part without the express written permission of Hydrolab Corporation is prohibited. This User’sManual is also an unpublished work protected under copyright laws of the United States of America. If this work becomes published,the following shall apply:

Copyright © 1997 Hydrolab CorporationAll Rights Reserved

HL#003078, REVISION E, April 1998

DataSonde, MiniSonde, SensorFlex, FreshFlow, ProFiler, and Surveyor are trademarks or registered trademarks of Hydrolab Corporation.All other marks mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

ContentsCustomer feedback form (inside front pocket)Introduction ........................................................................................................ 9Conventions ........................................................................................................ 10

SAFETY FIRST CHECKLIST

CHAPTER 1: ASSEMBLY, BASIC MENUS, AND INTRODUCTORYEXERCISES.........................................................................................................1-1

1. How to assemble your water monitoring system ...................................... 1-1

2. Basic menus .................................................................................................. 1-6Header lines ........................................................................................................ 1-6Prompt line ......................................................................................................... 1-6Menu line ............................................................................................................ 1-6Data header and measurement display lines ....................................................... 1-7Status line ........................................................................................................... 1-7

3. Introductory exercises ................................................................................. 1-8

CHAPTER 2: MENUS ........................................................................................2-1

1. Refresher exercise ........................................................................................ 2-1

2. Sensor information ...................................................................................... 2-3

3. Security levels ............................................................................................... 2-6

4. Displays ......................................................................................................... 2-10Parameter display ............................................................................................... 2-10File capture ......................................................................................................... 2-12

5. Special features ............................................................................................ 2-13Custom display ................................................................................................... 2-13Displaying your battery’s voltage on the screen................................................. 2-13Choosing your date format ................................................................................. 2-15Displaying values with a decimal point or a comma .......................................... 2-17Selecting and using the teletype (TTY) display mode ....................................... 2-19Changing the real-time display interval ............................................................. 2-23

Terminal baud rate options ................................................................................. 2-24Switching to the multidrop mode ....................................................................... 2-25

6. Other functions ............................................................................................ 2-27

7. Menu hierarchy............................................................................................ 2-33

CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION, AND STORAGE ..........3-1

1. Introduction to maintenance ...................................................................... 3-1When do I need to service or maintain the sensors? .......................................... 3-1What do I need to prepare for maintenance? ...................................................... 3-1

2. Introduction to calibration ......................................................................... 3-4When do I need to calibrate the sensors? ........................................................... 3-4What do I need to prepare for calibration? ......................................................... 3-4Sensor identification ........................................................................................... 3-6How do I calibrate the multiprobe using a computer? ....................................... 3-6

3. Dissolved Oxygen ......................................................................................... 3-13Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 3-13Calibration .......................................................................................................... 3-16

4. Conductivity , specific conductance, resistivity, TDS, and salinity ......... 3-21Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 3-21Calibration .......................................................................................................... 3-22

5. pH .................................................................................................................. 3-33Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 3-34Calibration .......................................................................................................... 3-39

6. Redox ............................................................................................................ 3-42Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 3-43Calibration .......................................................................................................... 3-43

7. Temperature ................................................................................................. 3-46Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 3-46Calibration .......................................................................................................... 3-46

8. Depth ............................................................................................................. 3-47Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 3-47Calibration .......................................................................................................... 3-48

9. Quick calibration troubleshooting guidelines ........................................... 3-50

10. How to maintain and service your multiprobe and its accessories ........ 3-51When do I need to service or maintain the multiprobe? ..................................... 3-51What can I easily service and replace on my own? ............................................ 3-51What do I need to service my equipment? ......................................................... 3-51The multiprobe ................................................................................................... 3-52The dryer ............................................................................................................ 3-53The FreshFlow™ miniature sample circulator ................................................... 3-55The batteries ....................................................................................................... 3-56

11. Storage recommendations ......................................................................... 3-57Multiprobe and sensor storage............................................................................ 3-57DOs and DON’Ts for electrical cables ............................................................... 3-57

CHAPTER 4: LOGGING AND DATA RETRIEVAL......................................4-1

1. The Hydrolab memory and logging system............................................... 4-1

2. The Files menu in the menu tree hierarchy ............................................... 4-3

3. File handling and communications ............................................................ 4-5Creating a file ..................................................................................................... 4-8Transferring a file ............................................................................................... 4-11Checking the status of a file ............................................................................... 4-19Deleting a file ..................................................................................................... 4-20The AutoLog feature ........................................................................................... 4-22File Setup ............................................................................................................ 4-24

CHAPTER 5: DEPLOYMENT AND FIELD APPLICATIONS ....................5-1

1. Deployment in open waters ......................................................................... 5-1Introduction ........................................................................................................ 5-1Long-term deployment in open waters ............................................................... 5-1Short-term deployment in open waters ............................................................... 5-6

2. Using the circulator ..................................................................................... 5-8

3. Using the flow cell ........................................................................................ 5-10

4. Pressure and temperature extremes .......................................................... 5-11

5. Data transmission lines ............................................................................... 5-13

6. Internal battery replacement ...................................................................... 5-14

CHAPTER 6: TROUBLESHOOTING ..............................................................6-1

1. Communications .......................................................................................... 6-1

2. Sensor-specific issues ................................................................................... 6-2

3. Additional troubleshooting ......................................................................... 6-3

CHAPTER 7: QUICK REFERENCE ...............................................................7-1

1. Introduction .................................................................................................. 7-1

2. Contents ......................................................................................................... 7-1

3. Abbreviations ................................................................................................ 7-2

4. Definitions ..................................................................................................... 7-3

5. Equipment characteristics ........................................................................... 7-7

6. Expected battery life information and currents ........................................ 7-9Battery packs ...................................................................................................... 7-9Lithium battery ................................................................................................... 7-10Frequently asked questions and battery life tables ............................................. 7-10

7. Battery replacement ..................................................................................... 7-13Multiprobe lithium battery replacement ............................................................. 7-13

8. Multiprobe error message directory ........................................................... 7-17

9. ProComm Plus for DOS basic commands .................................................. 7-18

10. HyperTerminal basic commands............................................................... 7-20

11. Menu trees ................................................................................................... 7-22

APPENDIX 1: SERVICE AND WARRANTY FORMS ...............................A1-1

APPENDIX 2: TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS SENSOR ....................................A2-1

1. Introduction ............................................................................................... A2-1

2. Maintenance ............................................................................................... A2-2

3. Calibration ................................................................................................. A2-3

APPENDIX 3: TURBIDITY..............................................................................A3-1

1. Maintenance ............................................................................................... A3-1

2. Setup ........................................................................................................... A3-2

3. Calibration ................................................................................................. A3-5

4. Troubleshooting turbidity ......................................................................... A3-8

APPENDIX 4: AMMONIUM ............................................................................A4-1

1. Maintenance ............................................................................................... A4-1

2. Calibration ................................................................................................. A4-2

3. Ammonium sensor replacement ............................................................... A4-10

4. Storage ........................................................................................................ A4-10

5. Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... A4-11

6. Technical Hints........................................................................................... A4-12

APPENDIX 5: CHLORIDE ..............................................................................A5-1

1. Maintenance ............................................................................................... A5-1

2. Calibration ................................................................................................. A5-2

3. Chloride sensor replacement .................................................................... A5-11

4. Storage ........................................................................................................ A5-11



APPENDIX 6: NITRATE ..................................................................................A6-1

1. Maintenance ............................................................................................... A6-1

2. Calibration ................................................................................................. A6-2

3. Nitrate sensor replacement ....................................................................... A6-10

4. Storage ........................................................................................................ A6-10



APPENDIX 7: SDI-12 .......................................................................................A7-1

1. Introduction ............................................................................................... A7-1

2. A brief theory of operation ........................................................................ A7-1Measure .................................................................................................................... A7-1Data ..........................................................................................................................A7-1

3. Setting your SDI address and delay ......................................................... A7-2

APPENDIX 8: RS-422/RS-485 ..........................................................................A8-1

1. Introduction ............................................................................................... A8-1

2. Connections ................................................................................................ A8-2

3. Operation.................................................................................................... A8-3

4. Cable Selection ........................................................................................... A8-5

APPENDIX 9: USING A MODEM WITH A HYDROLAB MULTIPROBE .....A9-1

1. Field Modem Installation .......................................................................... A9-1

2. Office Modem Installation ........................................................................ A9-3

3. Operation.................................................................................................... A9-4

NOTES

SHIPPING LABELS (inside back pocket)

DataSonde® 4 / MiniSonde® User’s Manual Revision E

10

Introduction

Thank you for choosing Hydrolab’s new line of water quality multiprobe loggers. As aglobal company and market leader, Hydrolab prides itself in the advanced technology,reliability, and serviceability of its instruments. Our customer support services are built onyears of experience in the field and are ready to answer your questions and help you “getthe job done.”

Hydrolab created the first multiprobe in the mid-1960’s. Although our development hasremained focused on quality, our instruments’ names have changed due to the wide rangeof products we offer. We recommend that you refer to your instrument using its specificname (e.g. for multiprobes: DataSonde 4 or MiniSonde; for display loggers: Surveyor 4),when calling for technical support or customer assistance.

Your multiprobe is shipped with a user’s manual, a basic maintenance kit, a temperaturesensor, a weighted sensor guard, and a material safety data sheet.

Please note that...

The product specifications and other information contained in this manual are subject tochange without notice.

Hydrolab Corporation has made a concerted effort to provide in this manual complete,accurate, and current information for the proper use of the equipment that you have pur-chased. Hydrolab may not be held responsible for any errors or omissions contained inthis user’s manual.

If you have any questions or comments regarding this manual or the proper use of yourequipment, contact Hydrolab Corporation at 800-949-3766 (in the United States of Americaand Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.


11

Conventions

This manual follows a number of conventions. Take a few minutes to read the followinginformation.

We used the metric system and included American-English equivalents in parentheses:e.g. 250 m (820 ft). The same applies to other units including degrees Fahrenheit (˚F)and Celsius (˚C). All figures were rounded off to the next or previous digit, e.g. 250 m =820 ft (not 820.20 ft). Conversion tables and equations are provided in this manual.

The American-English date format - month, day, year - is the multiprobe’s default date format.

All data menus in this manual are representative of IBM®, Apple®, or other personalcomputer screens, using ProComm Plus® communications software. If you are using aSurveyor® 4, please refer to the appropriate menu tree in the Surveyor 4 manual fordisplay configurations. If not using ProComm Plus, set your terminal to ANSI terminal emu-lation, 19200 baud, eight bits, no parity, and one stop bit (19200, N, 8, 1).

The instrument’s Main Menu and submenu options appear in the format that they will bedisplayed on your screen: e.g. Login, Setup, Calibrate, Files, etc.

Computer keystrokes are shown in boldface and match the keys on your computer, e.g.Ctrl , Esc or ESCAPE, ENTER , etc. Keystrokes connected by a + sign mean that youmust hold down the first key and press the second one. For instance, Ctrl+X means that youhave to hold down the Control key and press X .

The multiprobe screens and messages appear between two horizontal bars:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Time Temp DO

HH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat

23:11:15 24.59 48.3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The term “Multiprobe” refers to your water quality multiprobe (DataSonde 4 or MiniSonde).

The use of “he,” “him,” or “his” was chosen as a typographical convention and alsostands for “she,” “her,” or “hers” throughout the publication.

For additional information or technical support, call 800-949-3766 (in the United Statesof America and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.


SAFETY FIRST CHECKLIST

This document contains general precautions and warnings to follow when operating Hydrolab instru-ments and their peripherals. Please, keep this document handy for all operators.

POWER SUPPLIES:

To avoid potential fatal electrical shock and/or instrumentation damage, we suggest that you avoidusing AC current to power your multiprobe. When deploying your multiprobe outdoors, you shouldonly use battery power (with a combined voltage not to exceed 15 volts). If you elect to deploy yourmultiprobe outdoors using any power supply that is in any way connected to the AC mains (110 or 220VAC), your AC power supply cable MUST be protected by a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) device. Theinstallation of the GFI device MUST be done by a licensed electrician. This device may save your life!

OPENING A MULTIPROBE:

When loosening removable parts from a multiprobe, always point those parts away from your body andother people. In extreme conditions, excess pressure may build up inside any underwater housing, caus-ing the caps, sensors, or other removable parts to disengage with force sufficient to cause serious injury.

COMPONENT PROTECTION:

The multiprobe maximum immersion depth is 225 meters (738 feet). To protect your 0-10 and 0-25meter depth sensors, install the depth’s seal screw (provided in the MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit) inthe face of the multiprobe sensor cap. To protect your total dissolved gas sensor, install the protectivecap in place of the membrane cartridge.

The circulator impeller contains two magnets. To prevent damage, we recommend keeping diskettes orsimilar computer components away from the circulator’s impeller.

If you do not use a sensor or the circulator, insert an optional sensor expansion port plug in the vacantsensor expansion port to prevent any contamination or damage during maintenance, operation, or storage.

WATER AND THE INSTRUMENTS:

Water can get trapped between the multiprobe battery cap contact surface and the top of the multiprobebattery compartment o-rings. To avoid water leaks into the multiprobe battery compartment duringmaintenance or replacement, place the multiprobe horizontally on the work surface when removing thebattery cap. To avoid water contact with multiprobe internal components during battery replacement,we recommend that you avoid replacing the batteries close to a water source.

If water leaks into the multiprobe battery compartment, remove the batteries, pour the water out, andthoroughly dry the compartment with a hair dryer (on low heat) or a towel. Then, install the new batteries.

SOFTWARE ISSUES:

To avoid erasing your multiprobe’s main software or any other related data, do not attempt to log on tolevel 3 unless you have assistance from Hydrolab. For more information, call 800-949-3766 (in theUnited States of America and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.

RRRRR

RRRRR

RRRRR

RRRRR

RRRRR


1-1CHAPTER 1: ASSEMBLY, BASIC MENUS,AND INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES

In this chapter, we will go through an overview and a quick start on setting up your multi-probe and the other components of your new water quality monitoring system. You aregoing to learn how to get the show on the road in an interactive way, on-line that is! In thismanual, the standard water monitoring system consists of your multiprobe and your PC. Ifyou are using a Surveyor 4, please refer to the Surveyor 4 user’s manual for setup and displayconfigurations.

1. How to assemble your water monitoring system

This section will help you through the assembly process and show you the first communicationscreen which comes up on your computer.

STEP 1: Please open the shipping boxes and check that all the components you ordered areincluded and have not been damaged during transportation.

STEP 2: If you have a fixed cable, your cable is directly attached to your multiprobe. You canskip this step.

Otherwise, remove all protective plugs and keep them in a safe place, since you will need themwhen moving or storing your equipment.

Connect the calibration or detachable cable to your multiprobe (see figure 1, on the next page).Note the connector’s keying. You need to align the bigger pin on the multiprobe male connec-tor to the indicator dots on your cable’s connector (see figure 1-3, on the following pages). Toavoid bending or damaging the connectors’ pins, do not force the pins into the connectors.

STEP 3: If you need external power, use an external power adapter and select the propersystem to provide power for your multiprobe. Figure 1-2 - on the following pages - showsseveral power configurations.

! DANGER: Operate your multiprobe only with batteries (with a combinedvoltage not to exceed 15 volts) or with a Hydrolab power supply(as shown on figure 1-2 on the following pages). Connection toany other power supply can result in potentially fatal electricalshock and/or instrumentation damage. If you use a battery, makesure that your battery’s voltage is between 5 and 15 volts.PLEASE READ THE WARNINGS ON FIGURE 1-2.


1-2

ASSEMBLY, BASIC MENUS, AND INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES

Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab

___________________________________________________________________________________Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select...

HL Login Setup Calibrate Files ________________________________________________________________________________________

Time Temp ORP pH SpCond DO HH:MM:SS C mV Units mS/cm %Sat 23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48________________

IBM ®, Apple®,or other PC

Calibrationcable(013470)†

Externalpoweradapter*(013170)

11

Detachablecable(015XXX)††

Externalpoweradapter(013170)

Fixed cable(Several partnumbers)††

SDI-12 orRS-485RS-422adapter**(013510)



See next page for“Power options”

* This is an external power option for usewith earlier multiprobes (via the Sur-veyor 4 adapter), the calibration cable,the detachable cable, or the fixed cable.

** This cable usually connects to a datalogger, data collection platform, orother third-party device.

† These numbers stand for Hydrolabpart numbers. They were placed herefor your convenience.

†† These cables are available in severallengths. To choose the appropriatelength, call Hydrolab at 800-949-3766(in the U.S.A. and Canada only) or(512) 255-8841.

I.

11

111

111

11

11

11

1212

11

11

11

111

111

Da

taS

on

de®

4

Min

iSo

nd

e®

Surveyor® 4

There are many ways to connect a multiprobe to adisplay or a personal computer. Here are severalof the most common configurations.

Figure 1-1: Assembly options

1212

! Requiresinstallationof IBP inmultiprobe,unless you usea Surveyor 4123

123123

121212

121212

121212

121212

II. III.

P

P P PP

IV.


1-3


110 VAC 12VDC power adapter (013450)


External battery pack(110 VAC 12 VDC) (011050)(220 VAC 12 VDC) (012480)

Cigarette lighter adapter (013210)

Battery adapter (011530)

Vehicle batteryCables from “Figure 1: Assembly options”

HYDROLAB

121212

121212

1212

121212

1212

121212

! WARNING: To avoid potential fatal electrical shock, never connect your multiprobe to a powersource which exceeds 15 volts.

! WARNING: To avoid potential fatal electrical shock, we suggest that you avoid using AC current(the first two power adapters below) to power your multiprobe. When deploying your multiprobeoutdoors, you should only use battery power. If you elect to deploy your multiprobe outdoors usingany power supply that is in any way connected to the AC mains (110 or 220 VAC), your AC powersupply cable MUST be protected by a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) device. The installation of theGFI device MUST be done by a licensed electrician. This device may save your life!

Figure 1-2: Power options

P

P

SC

EP

TR

EP

ower supplyU

L

(1) You need to connect your country’s corresponding power cord to this IEC 320 connector.(2) To prevent damage to your instruments, we recommend that you use a regulated 12 VDC adapter, an

unregulated 12 VDC adapters could exceed your instruments voltage limit rating.

(1)

(2)

(2)


1-4


multiprobe

indicator dots

6-Pin Femalemarine connector

6-Pin Male marinebulkhead connector

4-Pin female 4 Pin Male

9-Pin Male Sub D 9-Pin Female Sub D

FIGURE 1-6: FIXED CABLE WITH PENETRATOR (INSTALLED POSITION)

FIGURE 1-3: MARINE CONNECTORS AND INDICATOR DOTS

FIGURE 1-4: METAL SHELL CONNECTORS

FIGURE 1-5: SUB D CONNECTORS

multiprobe

penetrator

12

12

1212

11

bigger pin

Figure 1-3 to 1-6: Connectors and plugs

DataSonde® 4 / MiniSonde® User’s Manual Revision B

1-5


STEP 4: Turn on your computer and boot the communications program (such as ProCommPlus for DOS for the IBM PC compatible, or MacTerminal for the Apple Macintosh). Set theterminal to ANSI terminal emulation, 19200 baud, eight bits, no parity, and one stop bit (19200,N, 8, 1). For more information about specific commands, refer to your ProComm Plus forDOS User’s Manual or the “ProComm Plus for DOS basic commands” in chapter 7.

If you are using a 100 meter or longer cable, you need to set your terminal baud rate to 9600 toaccommodate data transmission over such lengths.

STEP 5: Connect the other end of your calibration, detachable, fixed cable, or external poweradapter to your computer’s serial port.

At this point your multiprobe will begin communicating with your computer. The Main Menuscreen will appear:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 04/12/96

Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:20_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select...

HL Login Setup Calibrate Files Software

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Time Temp DO

HH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat

23:11:15 24.59 48.323:11:16 24.59 48.323:11:17 24.59 48.323:11:18 24.59 48.323:11:19 24.59 48.323:11:20 24.59 48.3_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Int Batt:12.3 Circltr:Off Logging:Off AutoLog:Off Security:2 SDI:N/A

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NOTE: The data header and menus shown in this manual are examples. Your display may

vary depending on the parameter(s) you selected. If you do not get the first screen,refer to “Communications” in chapter 6.


1-6


2. Basic menus

This section will show you how to use the multiprobe with your computer to meet yourspecifications and needs.

Header lines

The first two lines of the Main Menu contain your multiprobe’s identification information, thedate, and the current time. You can enter up to 20 characters (text or numbers) after Id. Yourmultiprobe’s Serial No. is factory-set and cannot be changed. Later in this chapter, we willshow you how to set your multiprobe’s Date and Time.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:20

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Prompt line

The next line contains the prompt:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select...

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This line shows the current menu level on your computer, here Main Menu.

Menu line

The line under the prompt is referred to as the menu line. The dark grey area over HL, meansthat your cursor is currently placed on HL. You can use your computer’s arrow keys (-> or <-)to move the cursor (the highlighted text: HL ) left or right on the menu line.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ HL Login Setup Calibrate Files Software

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DataSonde® 4 / MiniSonde® User’s Manual Revision C

1-7


Data header and measurement display lines

The center of your screen displays the data header, the measurement units or standard, andreal-time parameter lines that scroll upward at an adjustable rate. In the example below, thesample data header displays time, temperature, and dissolved oxygen (D.O.) with their corre-sponding chosen units or standards and readings, i.e. HH:MM:SS = 23:11:15, ˚C = 24.59, and%Sat = 48.3.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Time Temp DO

HH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat

23:11:15 24.59 48.3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Status line

The last line is referred to as the status line. The status line shows the status of themultiprobe’s external or internal batteries (voltage), the circulator (On/Off), the logging(Armed, Off, or N/A), the AutoLog (Armed, Off, or N/A), the security level (0-3), the SDIaddress (N/A or 0-9), and other menu items or messages, depending on the multiprobeconfiguration you have chosen. For instance, on the sample screen below, no externalbattery is connected to the multiprobe, the internal battery shows a 12.3 voltage output,the circulator (Circltr), Logging, and AutoLog are disabled, the login security is on level2, and the SDI address has not been set.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Int Batt:12.3 Circltr:Off Logging:Off AutoLog:Off Security:2 SDI:N/A

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NOTE: Should you decide to turn your circulator off from the Setup:System:Circulator menu

but choose Y when prompted to enable the circulator when you create a file, you willnotice that the status of your circulator, on the status line, will change from Off to Onduring the time of your logging run.


1-8


3. Introductory exercises

In this section, you will learn how to navigate within the menu and submenu structure withthree introductory exercises.

How to access menus and submenus

As seen in the previous section, the first menu which appears on your computer screen is themultiprobe’s Main Menu. To understand the Hydrolab user interface and to learn how easyit is to access other menu levels or submenus, we recommend that you practice the followingthree exercises on your computer. You should be on security level 2. If not, refer to the nextchapter under “Security levels”.

Exercise 1

This exercise guides you through the first menu available on your screen.

STEP 1: Move the cursor with the -> to Setup, as shown below, and press ENTER.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:20_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select...


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The next screen appears:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:

System Display I/O Parameters Sensors

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


1-9


STEP 2: Leave the cursor on System and press ENTER. You will get:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System:

Clock Circulator Audio Interval Security Id Reset Battery-Type

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Leave the cursor on Clock and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Clock:

Set-Date Set-Time

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Leave the cursor on Set-Date and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Clock: Set-Date:Enter the date (MMDDYY): <<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: You have reached the last submenu for this choice. Now you can type the currentdate - this example shows 041396 - and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Clock: Set-Date:Enter the date (MMDDYY): 041396<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: You will automatically be returned to the Main Menu. Your new date will appear onthe top right-hand corner of your screen:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 04/13/96Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:15:54

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Do you need a little more practice? Please, try out the next exercise.


1-10


Exercise 2

You are going to change the time of your multiprobe’s internal clock to match the current timeat your location.

STEP 1: From the Main Menu, move the cursor to Setup and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Then, leave the cursor on System and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Next, leave the cursor on Clock and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System:

Clock Circltr Audio Interval Security Id Reset Battery-Type

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


1-11


STEP 4: Finally, move the cursor to Set-Time and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Clock:

Set-Date Set-Time

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: You can now type the new time - this example shows 011000 - and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Clock: Set-Time:

Enter the time (HHMMSS): 011000<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: You will automatically be returned to the Main Menu. Your new time will appear onthe top right-hand corner of your screen:



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Congratulations! You have completed the second level of training. Please, move on toexercise 3.


1-12


12345678901234567890121234567890123456789012123456789012345678901212345678901234567890121234567890123456789012123456789012345678901212345678901234567890121234567890123456789012

FIGURE 1-7: DATASONDE 4 LID(screws on top of the storage cup)

FIGURE 1-8: DATASONDE 4 CAP(covers the bottom of the calibration cup)

FIGURE 1-9: DATASONDE 4 CALIBRATIONAND STORAGE CUP (SIDE VIEW)(The calibration cup is a storage cup

with its bottom removed)

Figures 1-7 to 1-12: Miscellaneous parts

FIGURE 1-11: MINISONDECALIBRATION AND STORAGE CAP

(screws on the MiniSonde cup)

FIGURE 1-10: MINISONDECALIBRATION AND STORAGE CUP

(There is only ONE cup for the MiniSonde)

FIGURE 1-12: MINISONDECALIBRATION AND STORAGE

CAP AND CUP (Assembled)


1-13


Exercise 3

For this exercise, let’s try calibrating the depth sensor. For your convenience and further reference,we have included the basic multiprobe calibration components on the previous page.

Calibration is carried out by entering zero for the standard at your deployment site, or at thelaboratory (if the barometric pressure at the laboratory is the same as that of the field site) tocancel the effect of changes in barometric pressure.

Steps to follow

STEP 1: In the Main Menu, move the cursor to Calibrate and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: First, move the cursor to Depth25 (or any other depth option) and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:

Temp Cond Oxygen Depth25

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Next, move the cursor to Dep25:meters, Dep25:feet, or Dep25:psi and select the unityou want to use. Let’s choose Dep25:meters and then press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Depth25:

Dep25:meters Dep25:feet Dep25:psi

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


1-14


STEP 4: Finally, type 0 after Enter zero value: [0.0]<< and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Depth25: Dep25:Meters

Enter zero value: [0.0]0<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Your depth sensor is now calibrated. You also have completed your last exercise and havepassed the Hydrolab basic menu on-line training with flying colors. You can now move on tothe next chapter.


2-1

CHAPTER 2: MENUS

This chapter takes a more detailed look at the Hydrolab menu and submenu structure. You willlearn your way beyond the Main Menu level through the submenu structure. Note that mainte-nance, calibration, and logging procedures are the object of separate chapters.

1. Refresher exercise

Practice the following refresher exercise as an introduction to the first submenu.

STEP 1: This is a shorter version of the first screen displayed on your computer. The high-lighted text (HL ) means that the cursor is currently on HL.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Press ENTER and the following submenu will appear:


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:22_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________HL:

Main Sensors

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2-2

MENUS

STEP 3: Press ENTER again and the real-time parameters are momentarily replaced with thefollowing screen:


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1998, Hydrolab 23:11:24_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________HL: Main:

Main Sensors

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Instrument name: DataSonde 4Logging Memory size (bytes): 241750Memory left (bytes): 241750Max number log files: 1Instrument abbreviation: DS4Software revision: 1.36Loader revision: 1.10Serial number: 00000000Date of manufacture: 4/10/98Int batt AmpHrs: 0% Internal power left: 0Ext batt AmpHrs: 7% External power left: 100

Press any key...

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Press any key to return to the Main Menu.

This information represents your instrument’s configuration and is specific to this particularinstrument. Depending on the instrument and the options you have installed, the screen abovemay show different values than your screen. For instance, your logging memory size couldread 497750.

Max number log files refers to the maximum number of log files currently supported by thisinstrument. This value can be changed using the Files:Setup menu. You can decrease theminimum logging interval by selecting a lower number of log files.

Software revision identifies the software release installed in your instrument. Refer to thisnumber when contacting Hydrolab Customer Support. Loader revision identifies the releaseof the separate program in the multiprobe that is used to install new software.


2-3

MENUS

The last four lines of the display show the status of your instrument’s power supplies. Int battAmpHrs and Ext batt AmpHrs show the maximum capacity for the two possible power sources.These values may vary depending on the type of batteries you have installed. These values areused by the logging status display to estimate the life of a logging event. If you change the typeof batteries used for either of the two power sources, you must update these values using theSetup:System:Battery-Type menu. % Internal power left and % External power left indicatethe capacity of the respective power source that is currently remaining.

The information on this screen is helpful to Hydrolab Customer Support to assist you with anyproblems that may arise.

Now that you have reviewed the way the software works, you can start learning more about theother levels of the multiprobe’s menu and submenus.

2. Sensor information

An important menu you should be aware of is the Sensors submenu. As a continuation of therefresher exercise, we are going to show you how you can retrieve sensor information on-line.

STEP 1: Leave your cursor on HL and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The next screen will appear:


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:22_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________HL:

Main Sensors

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2-4

MENUS

STEP 2: Move the cursor to Sensors and press ENTER to get:


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:24_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________HL: Sensors:

General User-Service

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Leave the cursor on General and press ENTER.STEP 3: The real-time parameter display lines are momentarily replaced with the followingscreen:


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:26_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________HL: Sensors: General:

General User-Service_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Channel Sensor Name Revision

0 Temp 1.031 Ions-1 1.072 Cond 1.083 Oxygen 1.03456 Depth25 1.03

Press any key...

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

As you can see on the screen above, each sensor has been assigned a specific place or channel.In this example, channels 4 and 5 are free and ready for new sensor and driver installation.Note that your screen may differ, depending on your instrument’s configuration.

STEP 4: If you press any key on your computer, you will be returned to the Main Menu.From there, repeat Step 1, then move the cursor to Sensors and press ENTER. Next, move thecursor to User-Service and press ENTER to get:


2-5

MENUS

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 04/12/96Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:26_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________HL: Sensors: User-Service: Temp Ions-1 Cond Oxygen * * Depth25____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Time Temp DOHH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat

23:11:23 24.59 48.323:11:24 24.59 48.323:11:25 24.59 48.323:11:26 24.59 48.3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

These are the sensors currently available on the multiprobe used in this example. This sub-menu helps you identify the meaning of any special characters appended to the data. Let’s lookat an example.

STEP 5: Leave the cursor on Temp and press ENTER, leave the cursor on Temp:˚C and pressENTER.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:30_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________HL: Sensors: User-Service: Temp: Temp:˚C:No service required

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The message No service required indicates that there are no special conditions applied to thedata. This does NOT indicate that the sensors do not require service. The sensors must bemaintained and calibrated at regular intervals even though No service required is shown.Table 2 on page 3-6 shows the compete list of possible messages.


2-6

MENUS

3. Security levels

When your multiprobe starts sending data to your computer upon initial receipt from the fac-tory, the Main Menu comes up in a default security level. This security level will determineyour access privileges to the software’s submenus. Level 2 is the factory-set default level.Except for a few details, your screen should look like this:




____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Time Temp DOHH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat

23:11:15 24.59 48.323:11:16 24.59 48.323:11:17 24.59 48.323:11:18 24.59 48.323:11:19 24.59 48.323:11:20 24.59 48.323:11:21 24.59 48.323:11:22 24.59 48.323:11:23 24.59 48.323:11:24 24.59 48.323:11:25 24.59 48.323:11:26 24.59 48.3_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Int Batt 12.3 Circltr Off Logging Off AutoLog: Off Security 2 SDI:N/A

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Level 0

Level-0 does not typically require a password. You can assign or remove passwords for thislevel by accessing Setup, System, Security, and choosing between Password or Default-Level.


2-7

MENUS





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Next, move the cursor to Security and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System:

Clock Circulator Audio Security Id Reset Battery-Type

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Finally, leave the cursor on Password and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Security:

Password Default-Level

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: You can now enter the desired password and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Security: Password:

Enter new password for this level: <<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DataSonde® 4 / MiniSonde® User ’s Manual Revision E

2-8

MENUS

To access levels 0 through 3 from the Main Menu, move the cursor to Login and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Login:

Level-0 Level-1 Level-2 Level-3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

On level 0, your access is restricted to HL which provides basic system information, includingthe loader version (i.e. the loader software used to load new drivers) and sensors installed, andto Login which allows you to access a new security level. The cursor will skip inaccessiblesubmenus (such as Setup or Calibrate for level 0).

Level 1

Level-1 does not typically require a password. You can assign or remove passwords for thislevel by accessing Login, System, Security, and choosing between Password or Default-Level.To do so, follow the instructions in the previous section entitled “Level 0” .

On level 1, your access is restricted to HL, Login, and Files (if your multiprobe is equipped withthe logging feature.) Login allows you to change security levels. Files allows you to transferfiles or review the status of files.

Level 2

Level-2 does not typically require a password. You can assign or remove passwords for thislevel by accessing Login, System, Security, and choosing between Password or Default-Level.”To do so, follow the instructions in the above section entitled Level 0.

On level 2, your access is restricted to HL, Login, Setup, Calibrate, and Files (if your multi-probe is equipped with the logging feature.) Setup allows you to change System information,except for Reset and Battery-type which are Level 3 functions. Setup also gives you access toDisplay to add or remove the parameters displayed on your computer screen or open a capturefile. An “*” represents a slot or channel available for a new parameter.

The next accessible submenu in Setup is I/O which allows you to establish the SDI and Mod-bus™ setup options (see “Appendix 7: SDI-12” in “Appendices”). Then, come Parameters andSensors which let you access parameter and sensor setup, they are both Level 3 functions.

The Calibrate submenu is designed to access all parameters available on your multiprobe forcalibration (except for temperature, which is factory-calibrated). You are then prompted toenter the measurement unit or standard you want to select for a specific parameter reading.

The Files submenu has 5 options that are accessible in Level 2: Create, Transfer, Status,


2-9

MENUS

Delete, and AutoLog. These options provide access to the multiprobe’s logging features.

! WARNING : To avoid erasing your multip robe’s main software or any otherrelated data, do not attempt to log on to level 3 unless you haveassistance from Hydrolab. For more information, call 800-949-3766 (in the United States of America and Canada only) or(512) 255-8841.

Level 3

Level-3 requires a password at all times. This password is factory-installed and can only bechanged with the assistance of Hydrolab’s technical support or customer service. You can nowaccess HL, Login, Setup, Calibrate, Files, (if your multiprobe is equipped with the loggingfeature) and Software (to load main code and new sensor drivers on your multiprobe).

For more information on how to obtain the latest software and upgrading instructions, pleasecall Hydrolab at 800-949-3766 (in the U.S.A. and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.

Setup allows you to change System information, including the Reset option which resets allinformation associated with the multiprobe’s main circuit board: the main software or the indi-vidual sensor software and drivers. An * under the Sensors submenu represents a slot or chan-nel available for a new parameter and its associated driver. The Parameters submenu allowsyou to choose the type of parameter setup for calibration.

TABLE 1: SECURITY LEVELS QUICK REFERENCE

tceleS drowssaP sseccaoT

0-leveL TON TON TON TON TON DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER nigoL,LH

1-leveL TON TON TON TON TON DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER )sutatselifdnarefsnart(seliF,nigoL,LH

2-leveL TON TON TON TON TON DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER

dna,sretemaraP,teseRroftpecxe(puteS,nigoL,LHdna,sutats,refsnart,eteled,etaerc(seliF,etarbilaC,)srosneS

)goLotuA

3-leveL DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER DERIUQER .erawtfoSdna,seliF,etarbilaC,)2-leveLees(puteS,nigoL,LH


2-10

MENUS

4. Displays

Parameter display

A data header line can display up to ten or eleven parameters, depending on the field’s width.Temperature is the only parameter that will always appear on your display when you receiveyour instrument from the factory. You can then add other parameters to the display line.

To display or remove a parameter, follow the next sequence of actions and repeat it for theother parameters you wish to display or remove. Note that the sample displays do not neces-sarily represent what will appear on your screen.

STEP 1: From the Main Menu, move your cursor to Setup and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Then, move the cursor to Display and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: The next submenu will appear:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display:

Parameters Battery Date-Time Capture Radix TTY Interval

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Press ENTER and a list of parameters will appear.

DataSonde® 4 / MiniSonde® User’s Manual Revision D

2-11

MENUS

STEP 4: Let’s choose Ions-1 (or any other parameter you wish to add to your display). Movethe cursor to Ions and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display: Parameters:

Temp Ions-1 Cond Oxygen * * Depth25

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NOTES: Your multiprobe display may vary and show more or less asterisks. This depends on

the number of sensors installed on your unit. To be able to add or remove a parameter in the Display submenu, you need to have the

corresponding sensor installed on your multiprobe.

STEP 5: Next, a list of parameters and associated measurement units available in the selectedsensor driver appear. For our example, we have pH:Units, ORP:mV, NH4+:mg/l-N, NH4Tot:mg/l-N,NO3-:mg/l-N, NH4+:mV, and NO3-:mV. Let’s select pH:Units and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display: Parameters: Ions-1:

pH/Units ORP:mV NH4+:mg/l-N NH4Tot:mg/l-N NO3-:mg/l-N NH4+:mV NO3-:mV

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Move your cursor and press ENTER to Add or Remove the selected parameter.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display: Parameters: Ions-1: pH:Units:

Add Remove

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

After completing the previous selection, you will be returned to the Main Menu. Repeat theprocedure until your Main Menu display screen meets your deployment specifications.


2-12

MENUS

File capture

Under Setup:Display, you have another choice next to Parameters, it is called Capture. Thisfeature allows you to store the data being currently received from the multiprobe to a file inyour computer or on a diskette. In this example we are using ProComm Plus for DOS and willrefer to the commands corresponding to this application. If you have a different terminalemulator, follow the prompts to open a capture file or refer to your user’s manual. You can alsorefer to chapter 7 under “HyperTerminal basic commands”.

STEP 1: For ProComm Plus for DOS users, press Alt+S to enter the setup utility. Move thecursor down to FILE/PATH OPTIONS and press ENTER.

STEP 2: Type C to change the default path for downloaded files, or just remember what thedefault is when you need to retrieve the capture file. Then, press ENTER when done and Esctwice to exit the setup utility and return to your multiprobe’s screen.

STEP 3: From the Main Menu, move the cursor to Setup and press ENTER. Next, move toDisplay and press ENTER. Finally, move the cursor to Capture and press ENTER, the real-time parameters temporarily disappear and the next screen comes up:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display: Capture:

Open capture file; press a key to start, press a key to stop...____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Time Temp DOHH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The message tells you to open a capture file. For ProComm Plus for DOS users, press Alt+F1 ,you are now prompted to enter the log file name, or you can hit ENTER to accept the defaultwhich is determined by the setup utility under FILE/PATH OPTIONS . For this example, wehave chosen Capture1. Then, press ENTER.

Press any key to start the capture file and once you have decided you have sufficient data, closethe capture file and press any key to stop.


2-13

MENUS

You will then be returned to the Main Menu. ProComm Plus for DOS users can press Alt+F4to switch to their DOS prompt. There, they can choose the default path for downloaded files(C:\PCPLUS, for instance), then type Dir and press ENTER, they can see that the last filecreated was “Capture1” (or the name you assigned).

Within ProComm Plus for DOS, Alt+V will allow users to view the capture file. Instead ofcapturing data to a file, you can capture data directly to a printer by pressing Alt+L instead ofAlt+F1 .

5. Special features

Custom display

Your multiprobe displays real-time readings on your screen while you are moving through themenus and submenus or performing an operation, such as calibration.

You can repeat a parameter on the real-time parameter display line. For instance you canchoose to have Temp (in ˚C) as the first parameter on your display, followed by ORP, pH, SpCond,DO, Depth25, and then for the last one, you can repeat Temp (in ˚F this time).

For this example, your final display would look like this:




____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Time Temp ORP pH SpCond DO Depth25 TempHH:MM:SS ˚C mV Units mS/cm %Sat meters ˚F

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3 25.00 76.2

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Displaying your battery’s voltage on the screen

This next feature allows you to display your internal or external battery voltage next to otherreal-time parameters on your computer screen. Follow the next steps to add your battery’sreadings to or remove it from your computer screen.


2-14

MENUS

STEP 1: Move the cursor to Setup and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:22_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Next, move the cursor to Battery and press ENTER.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:24_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: You now have the choice to display information about your multiprobe’s powersupplies on the screen, like any other parameter:


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:26_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display: Battery:

Intbatt:volts Extbatt:volts Intbatt:%Left Extbatt:%Left

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________You can choose to display the voltage or the capacity percentage remaining for the internal andexternal power sources.


2-15

MENUS

STEP 5: For our example, we chose to display the internal battery voltage. Now you can Addor Remove the chosen parameter. Make your selection and press ENTER.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:28_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display: Battery: Intbatt:volts:

Add Remove

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: We have chosen to add the reading to our screen and were returned to the Main Menuautomatically after our choice. Now the internal battery reading is displayed on the screen:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 04/12/96Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:32_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select...

HL Login Setup Calibrate Files Software____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Time Temp IBattHH:MM:SS ˚C Volts

23:11:31 24.59 12.023:11:32 24.59 12.023:11:33 24.59 12.123:11:34 24.59 12.1_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Int Batt 12.1 Circltr Off Logging Off AutoLog: Off Security 2 SDI:N/A

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Note that the battery with the highest reading is still displayed at the bottom of your screen.

Choosing your date format

This feature allows you to specify the date format that will be used by Hydrolab’s multiprobesoftware. The choices are: MMDDYY (“English” date format), DDMMYY (“European”date format), and YYMMDD (“Asian” date format). Follow the next steps to configure yourmultiprobe according to your specific needs.


2-16

MENUS

STEP 1: In the Main Menu, move the cursor to Setup and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Leave the cursor on System and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Then, leave the cursor on Clock and press ENTER.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:24_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Next, move the cursor to Date-Format and press ENTER.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:26_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Clock:

Set-Date Set-Time Date-Format

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2-17

MENUS

STEP 5: You can now choose between the “English” date format (MMDDYY), the “Euro-pean” date format (DDMMYY), and the “Asian” date format (YYMMDD). Once you havemade your selection, press ENTER.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:28_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Clock: Date-Format:

MMDDYY DDMMYY YYMMDDD

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NOTE: You can add the current date to your multiprobe real-time display by going to

Setup:Display:Date-Time and choosing Date. The date will scroll on your screenalong with the rest of your parameters. The same applies to Time, which is alreadyautomatically displayed on the first column on the left hand side of your screen, andcan be added anywhere else on your screen (for instance: Time Temp SpCond TDGpH DO Time).

Displaying values with a decimal point or a comma

This feature allows you to choose the radix (either a decimal point or a comma) used within anumeric value. For example, to choose to display your battery readings (and the rest of yourreadings) as Int Batt: 12.1 (with a decimal point) or as Int Batt: 12,1 (with a comma), followthe next steps.





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



2-18

MENUS




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Next, move the cursor to Radix and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: You have now the choice between a decimal point or a comma to separate the valuesthat appear on your screen. Make your selection and press ENTER.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:26_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display: Radix:

Decimal-point Comma

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If you select Decimal-Point, your files will automatically have comma separated values. If youchoose Comma, your files will automatically have tab separated values.

STEP 5: For our example, we chose Comma. You will automatically be returned to the MainMenu. The changes will appear on your display as in the example below.


2-19

MENUS


HL Login Setup Calibrate Files Software____________________________________________________________________________________________________________


23:11:27 24.59 12.023:11:28 24,59 12,023:11:29 24,59 12,123:11:30 24,59 12,1_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Int Batt 12,1 Circltr Off Logging Off AutoLog: Off Security 2 SDI:N/A

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Selecting and using the teletype (TTY) display mode

This feature allows you to switch from the ANSI mode (used to display your multiprobe read-ings) to the TTY (teletype) mode. TTY mode is a very simple interface that provides data andlimited menu access for external devices that interface with earlier generations of multiprobes.Follow the next steps to switch modes.





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2-20

MENUS

STEP 3: Next, move the cursor to TTY (which stands for teletype format) and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: A message indicates that the multiprobe is changing to the TTY mode: Entering TTYdisplay mode...


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:26_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Display: TTY: Entering TTY display mode...

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: After a few seconds, and a blank screen, the new display appears, like in the examplebelow.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________231140 24.59 12.1231142 24.59 12.1231143 24.59 12.1231144 24.59 12.0231145 24.59 12.0231146 24.59 12.0

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The TTY mode responds to several commands which are explained below.

STEP 6: To understand the parameters on the screen, press the SPACEBAR key. The nextprompt appears on your screen, which is now “frozen”, waiting for a command.


2-21

MENUS

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________231140 24.59 12.1231142 24.59 12.1231143 24.59 12.1231144 24.59 12.0231145 24.59 12.0231146 24.59 12.0

HM?: _

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Press the ? key to get:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________231140 24.59 12.1231142 24.59 12.1231143 24.59 12.1231144 24.59 12.0231145 24.59 12.0231146 24.59 12.0

HM?: ?

Main Menu(H)eader(M)easure(Q)uit TTY ModePlease enter your choice: _

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Main Menu gives you 3 choices, a (H) for Header, an (M) for Measure, and a (Q) for Quit.Let’s see what these choices will display on your screen.

STEP 8: Let’s start with (H)eader by pressing the letter H on your computer keyboard.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________231140 24.59 12.1231142 24.59 12.1231143 24.59 12.1231144 24.59 12.0231145 24.59 12.0231146 24.59 12.0

HM?: ?

Main Menu(H)eader(M)easure(Q)uit TTY Mode


2-22

MENUS

Please enter your choice: Hn/a


231203 24.59 12.0

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The header which gives you the name and the unit of the parameters displayed appears on yourscreen and the data will continue to scroll up.

STEP 9: Now, for (M)easure, you need to press the SPACEBAR key and then type M on yourkeyboard. This feature allows you to display a line of data on your screen without waiting forthe normal display time. For instance, if you have set your multiprobe to send a line of dataevery 10 minutes and want to bypass this long interval, you can press the SPACEBAR key andM to obtain a line of data.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________HM?: M

231302 24.59 12.0

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 10: Finally, if you want to exit the TTY mode, you will need to press the SPACEBARkey and then Q on your computer keyboard.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________231346 24.59 12.0

HM?: Entering ANSI display mode...

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

After a few seconds, you will be returned to the ANSI mode and to your familiar Main Menudisplay.

NOTES: Remember that you will need to press the SPACEBAR key whenever you want to

select a new command (such as H, M, Q, or ?) in the TTY mode. All multiprobe options, such as display interval, baud rate, etc, must be set while you are

in the ANSI mode. Once you switch to TTY, these options are no longer accessible. The multiprobe will remain in TTY mode until you exit (or (Q)uit) to the ANSI mode.


2-23

MENUS

Changing the real-time display interval

This feature allows you to change the rate at which the real-time parameter readings are scrolledon your display (such as a PC or a Surveyor 4).





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Next, move the cursor to Interval and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Type the new interval in HHMMSS format (hours, minutes, and seconds) and pressENTER.


2-24

MENUS

You will then be returned to the Main Menu.

Terminal baud rate options

Follow the next steps to select your terminal baud rate. To interface with a multiprobe, yourterminal baud rate is usually set on 19200 or 9600 (depending on the length of your cables).





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Next, move the cursor to I/O and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Then, move the cursor to Terminal-BaudRate and press ENTER.


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:24_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: I/O:

SDI-Address SDI-Delay MODBUS-Address Terminal-BaudRate Multidrop

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2-25

MENUS

STEP 4: You will get the following screen:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: I/O: Terminal-BaudRate:

300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Make your selection and press ENTER.

NOTE: For terminal baud rates of 9600 and less, your multiprobe will revert to 9600 for opera-

tion with a Surveyor 4.

Switching to the multidrop mode

This feature allows you to switch from the ANSI mode (used to display your multiprobe read-ings) to the multidrop mode. The multidrop mode is an interface mode which allows the userto “drop” several lines of communication to several multiprobes through a device that supportsa multidrop interface (such as a Surveyor 4 data display, a device using the ProFiler software,or another user device). Follow these steps to switch from the ANSI to the multidrop mode.This feature requires Level-3 security access.

! WARNING: To be able to switch back to ANSI mode, you need to make surethat you have a multidrop master (such as a Surveyor 4 datadisplay, a device using the ProFiler software, or another userdevice), BEFORE you switch to the multidrop mode. Other-wise, you will not be able to reestablish communications withyour multiprobe in ANSI mode. Note that ProComm Plus willallow you to switch to multidrop mode, but it will not allow youto switch back to ANSI mode.



Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:20_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select... HL Login Setup Calibrate Files Software

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2-26

MENUS





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Then, move the cursor to Multidrop and press ENTER


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:24_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: I/O:

SDI-Address SDI-Delay MODBUS-Address Terminal-BaudRate Multidrop

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: You are now prompted to choose to Enter Multidrop mode (ANSI communication willstop)? (Y/N):


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:22_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: I/O: Multidrop: Enter Multidrop mode (ANSI communication will stop)? (Y/N): <<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Make your selection and press ENTER.

If you select Y, your screen will display the following message: Entering Multidrop mode... Ablank screen will appear. To interface in the multidrop mode and to be able to return to theANSI mode, you need to connect your multiprobe to a multidrop master (such as a Surveyor 4data display, a device using the ProFiler software, or another user device).

If you select N, you will be returned to the Main Menu.


2-27

MENUS

6. Other functions

Tips and hints

To return to the Main Menu (i.e. the first screen) or to correct a typing error, press the ESCAPEor Esc key.

If you make a mistake, the multiprobe software will display error messages on your screen.For instance, if you entered 99:56:00 for the current time, the message Invalid entry... willappear for a couple of seconds and you will be returned to the Main Menu.

The menu and submenus path

When accessing submenus, it is helpful to keep an eye on the prompt line. This line displaysthe path you followed for each level you reach. Take a look at the next example:

STEP 1: Let’s start from the Main Menu and move the cursor to Setup, and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Now, leave the cursor on System, and press ENTER. Keep an eye on the first line onthe next sample screen.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Finally, move the cursor to Audio and press ENTER. The first line has gainedanother level.


2-28

MENUS

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: This is the final screen you will see for this path. Use your arrow keys to move thecursor and turn your multiprobe’s sound (sharp beep) On or Off, then press ENTER to acceptthe selection. Note the detailed hierarchy on the first line of the following sample screen:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Audio:

On Off

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The header

Another important user-friendly feature of your multiprobe’s software is the informationcontained in the header.

To personalize your DataSonde 4 or MiniSonde, you can select an ID for your multiprobe byfollowing this sequence:

STEP 1: From the Main Menu, move your cursor to Setup and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2-29

MENUS

STEP 3: Next, move the cursor to Id and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Type your instrument identification label after the next prompt and press ENTER.Note that the Id can be a series of up to 20 characters (text or numbers).

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Id:

Enter new Instrument Id: <<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The power

You can change the battery specifications used to compute remaining capacity for the twopossible multiprobe power sources.

STEP 1: Log-in to security level 3 and then from the Main Menu, move your cursor to Setupand press ENTER.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



2-30

MENUS

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/13/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 10:13:51_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Next, move the cursor to Battery-Type and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/13/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 10:15:19_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Select the power source that you wish to modify.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/13/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 10:17:25_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Battery-Type:

Internal External

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: Now you are asked to enter the amp hour capacity of the battery or batteries thatyou are using.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/13/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 10:18:56_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Battery-Type: Internal:Batt Amp-Hrs: [0.0]«

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


2-31

MENUS

This value can be obtained from manufacturer’s data sheets. Some typical room tempera-ture values are listed below.

TABLE 1A: TYPICAL BATTERY SPECIFICATIONS

epyTyrettaB srH-pmAttaB egatloVtratS egatloVdnE

enilaklA”AA“4 58.2 0.6 2.3

enilaklA”AA“8 58.2 0.21 4.6

muihtiL”AA“4 07.3 0.6 2.3

enilaklA”C“8 8.7 0.21 4.6

kcaPttaBlanretxE 7 0.21 5.01

For cells that are connected in series such as those used in the multiprobe internal battery,the amp-hour capacity is that of a single cell.

STEP 6: Next, you are asked to enter the starting battery voltage.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/13/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 10:42:32_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Battery-Type: Internal:Start Voltage: [0.0]«

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Select a value from the table above. This is the sum of the cell voltages in a series con-nected pack when the cells are new and unused.

STEP 7: Last, you are asked for the end voltage of the battery.


2-32

MENUS

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/13/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 10:45:42_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Battery-Type: Internal:End Voltage: [0.0]«

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Select a value from the table on the previous page. This is the sum of the cell voltages in aseries connected pack when the cells are considered to be dead. After completing the appropri-ate changes, you will be returned to the Main Menu.

Hydrolab uses Duracell alkaline batteries at 25 °C for its battery tests and capacity estimates.The capacities of other brands and types may be different. Also, the capacity of alkaline batter-ies degrades substantially at cold temperatures (20% capacity reduction at 0°C). Generally,lithium batteries are able to retain their rated capacity at much colder temperatures. Parallelconnected cells are not recommended due to the possibility of gas discharge caused by charg-ing of individual cells by other cells.

The internal battery will need to be re-specified if new software is loaded or the multiprobehas been reset. The external battery will default to the specifications for Hydrolab’s externalbattery pack.

Since your instrument can be powered by different sources, it will always use the highest-voltage power source available. For instance, if your multiprobe is equipped with internalbatteries with a voltage reading of 12.3 and is connected to an external battery with a voltagerating of 12.2, your instrument will continue using its internal batteries as its main powersource, until the voltage drops below that of the external battery’s.

There are two possible display combinations for the external and internal battery status bar.The numbers given are examples, your instrument readings may be different. Your MiniSondeinternal battery reading should read around 6 volts (for 4 AA cells), when you use new batteries.

1. You are running on external battery power which is reading 12.2 volts. The voltage of theinternal battery, if any, is lower than the voltage of the external battery.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________23:11:26 24.59 48.3

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Ext Batt 12.2 Circltr Off Logging Off AutoLog:Off Security 2 SDI:0

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2. You are running on internal battery power which is reading 12.3 volts. The voltage of theexternal battery, if any connected, is lower than the voltage of the internal battery.


2-33

MENUS

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________23:11:26 24.59 48.3

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Int Batt 12.3 Circltr Off Logging Off AutoLog:Off Security 2 SDI:0

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If you have no internal batteries and did not connect any external battery, your screen will not showany data at all, it will be blank! So, make sure that you use at least one of either power sources orthat you use a Surveyor 4 Data Display which will provide power to your multiprobe.

7. Menu hierarchyThe screen format shown, up to now, was the display as it comes up on your computer screen.To help you develop a comprehensive understanding and a practical training of the Hydrolabmultiprobe menu and submenu hierarchy, we have developed the following interactive exer-cise. This quick training exercise will allow you to navigate easily through the menu hierarchyusing the nine menu trees that you will find in chapter 7 of this manual.

To give an example of the correlation between the Main Menu screens and the menu trees, repeatthe exercise given in the section on page 2-24 entitled “The menu and submenus path.” This time,instead of using the display screens as guidelines, refer to the following menu tree portion:

Main Menu

Setup

System

Audio

On

Once you have mastered the technique, it becomes easy to navigate through the menus.

As shown in the previous sections, the menu structure is extensive and depends on the sensorsyou selected when purchasing your equipment. There are multiple-level accesses and sub-menus. The multiprobe menu trees will provide you with a comprehensive understanding anda quick reference of the menu hierarchy.


3-1CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE,CALIBRATION, AND STORAGE

1. Introduction to maintenance

! WARNING: W hen loosening removable parts from a multiprobe, always pointthose parts away from your body and other people. In extremeconditions, excess pressure may build up inside any underwaterhousing, causing the caps, sensors, or other removable parts todisengage with force sufficient to cause serious injury.

To ensure continued and reliable operation of your Hydrolab water quality monitoring system,we recommend that you schedule thorough and regular maintenance programs. To determinethe appropriate maintenance intervals required for your deployment site, make a periodic vi-sual inspection of your equipment and sensors, compare your pre- and post-calibration results,and monitor your sensors’ response time. To standardize and control all maintenance activi-ties, we encourage that you to implement company standards (forms, logs, procedures, regularbackups, quality control, etc.).

When do I need to service or maintain the sensors?

• When you are taking your multiprobe out of storage• When you have deployed your multiprobe and notice fouling of the sensors• When you are ready to calibrate the sensors• However, you do not need to service your sensors if you have just received your

equipment from Hydrolab. You still need to calibrate your sensors to meet yourdeployment needs.

What do I need to prepare for maintenance?

• Deionized water• Methanol (isopropyl alcohol may be substituted)• Soap• A very mild abrasive, such as toothpaste, jeweler’s rouge, or a fine polishing strip• Very clean, soft, nonabrasive lint-free cloths• Cotton balls or cotton swabs• 1 pair of scissors or 1 pocket knife• 1 standard screwdriver


3-2

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE

Hydrolab’s MS basic maintenance kit (Ref. No. 013280) which contains:• 1 Allen wrench (3/32 in.)• 1 Allen wrench (7/64 in.)• 1 spanner wrench• 2 o-rings (1.400 x .075 in.)• 2 screws (No. 4-40 x 1/8 in.)• 2 screws (No. 6-32 x 3/16 in.)• 1 seal screw (No. 4-40 x 3/8 in.)• Silicone grease• 1 optional sensor expansion port plug

Hydrolab’s DS4 basic maintenance kit (Ref. No. 013490) which contains:• 1 calibration cup• 1 storage cup• 1 Allen wrench (9/64 in.)• 1 spanner wrench• 4 o-rings (568-118)• 2 o-rings (568-233)• 2 screws (No. 8-32 x 1/4 in.)• 1 seal screw (No. 8-32 x 1/4 in.)• Silicone grease• 1 optional sensor expansion port plug

Hydrolab’s MS/DS4 pH maintenance kits (Ref. No. 013410 or 013930) which contain:• Reference electrolyte: 3 molar potassium chloride (3M KCl) saturated with silver

chloride (AgCl)• 1 Teflon® junction (shipped in a plastic bottle with liquid to protect the junction in Ref.

No. 013410) for rebuildable standard reference electrode (use only if your old junctionneeds to be replaced)

• 1 small blue o-ring (40-180) for the spare Teflon junction (Ref. No. 013410 only)• 1 hypodermic syringe• 1 soft-bristle brush (Ref. No. 013410 only)• 1 standard screwdriver (Ref. No. 013410 only)

((SAME I

N PH CAL SECTION LATER IN THIS CHAPTER, UPDATE WHEN CHGED))NOTES: A powder pH buffer kit is available from Hydrolab. This kit includes dry pH buffer

powders for mixing pH calibration solutions. Powders for 4, 7, and 10 buffers, plusthree 50 ml bottles (for dilution with deionized water) are included in the kit (No.013630).

pH calibration solutions are also available from Hydrolab. They are NIST-traceable andcome in 473 ml bottles. pH solutions 4 (No. 013660), 7 (No. 013670), and 10(No. 013680).


3-3


12345678901234567890121234567890123456789012123456789012345678901212345678901234567890121234567890123456789012123456789012345678901212345678901234567890121234567890123456789012

FIGURE 3-1: DATASONDE 4 LID(screws on top of the storage cup)

FIGURE 3-2: DATASONDE 4 CAP(covers the bottom of the calibration cup)

FIGURE 3-3: DATASONDE 4 CALIBRATIONAND STORAGE CUP (SIDE VIEW)(The calibration cup is a storage cup

with its bottom removed)

Figures 3-1 to 3-6: Miscellaneous parts

FIGURE 3-5: MINISONDECALIBRATION AND STORAGE CAP

(screws on the MiniSonde cup)

FIGURE 3-4: MINISONDECALIBRATION AND STORAGE CUP

(There is only ONE cup for the MiniSonde)




3-4


Hydrolab’s MS/DS4 D.O. maintenance kit (Ref. No. 013430) which contains:• One 60 ml bottle of D.O. electrolyte, 2M KCl• 1 white D.O. electrolyte screw-on bottle cap• 1 D.O. standard membrane pack (approximately 20 count)• 2 o-rings (568-110)

Sensor maintenance is probably the most important action you can take to keep your multiprobeoperational and to improve the quality of your field measurements. A contaminated, worn-out, ordamaged sensor will not produce a reliable reading. Once your service routine is in place, werecommend that you service all sensors and allow them to equilibrate in tap water overnightbefore calibration.

2. Introduction to calibrationWhen loosening removable parts from a multiprobe, always point those parts away from yourbody and other people. In extreme conditions, excess pressure may build up inside any underwa-ter housing, causing the caps, sensors, or other removable parts to disengage with force sufficientto cause serious injury.

Proper maintenance of all sensors should precede calibration. Always allow sufficient time forthermal stabilization of your standards. To reduce the time for stabilization, try to keep all cali-bration standards and your Hydrolab equipment stored at the same temperature before you beginparameter calibration. Always use fresh standards and do not let anyone tamper with them.

When do I need to calibrate the sensors?

• Before leaving the factory, all sensors are checked for calibration. However, you needto calibrate them for your specific site and applications.

• When fouling has occurred or is noticeable. This is also site-specific.• The frequency of your multiprobe deployments will also determine calibration intervals.• When adding or removing certain components for different applications (e.g. the

circulator) or when replacing components (e.g. the Teflon junction of the pH refer-ence electrode).

Some of your system’s components are affected by time, usage, and the environment. Toensure instrument accuracy, we recommend that you periodically confirm proper operation byperforming routine tests of the system under standard conditions. Your multiprobe can becalibrated in the field or at your facilities. Equipment checks and adjustments made beforegoing to the field tend to be more precise than those made under field conditions.

What do I need to prepare for calibration?

• Deionized water• Methanol (isopropyl alcohol may be substituted)• Specific conductance or salinity standards. The value of the calibration standard should


3-5


be close to the highest conductivity likely to be measured. Conductivity calibration stan-dards are available from Hydrolab. They are NIST-traceable and come in 946 ml bottles:100 µmhos/cm (No. 013610), 500 µmhos/cm (No. 013770), 1,412 µmhos/cm (No.013620), 12,856 µmhos/cm (No. 013640), 47,600 µmhos/cm (013650).

• pH standards: 7-buffer, and one of the values approximating that of your sample site• Redox standards (prepared by dissolving four grams of quinhydrone in 500 ml of 4 or 7 pH

buffers). Redox calibration solutions are also available from Hydrolab. The first solution isZobell’s solution (473 ml bottle, No. 013860) and is APHA-approved. The second one isLight’s solution (473 ml bottle, No. 013870) and is APHA- and ASTM-approved.

• Lint-free cloths• 1 DS4 calibration cup (see figure 3-3, on the previous pages)• 1 DS4 cap (see figure 3-2, on the previous pages)• 1 DS4 lid (see figure 3-1, on the previous pages)• 1 MS cup (see figure 3-4, on the previous pages)• 1 MS cap (see figure 3-5, on the previous pages)• Standard and Phillips screwdrivers

((SAME COND & ORP STANDARDS ABOVE IN COND/ORP CAL SECTIONS IN THIS CHPTR))((ADD NEW OPTIONAL SENSORS WHEN NEW APPENDICES ARE ADDED!!))For other sensors, such as total dissolved gas, turbidity, ammonium, chloride, or nitrate, see“Appendices” at the end of this manual.

Calibrating your multiprobe sensors is quick and easy

1. Calibration for specific conductance and salinity, pH, and redox is achieved by pour-ing a calibration standard into the DS4 calibration or MS cup or immersing the entiremultiprobe in a bucket of standard solution. Then, you select the sensor to be cali-brated, allow time for the solution to stabilize, and enter the value of the standard.

2. Dissolved oxygen (D.O.) and % D.O. saturation (%Sat) are calibrated in the DS4 cali-bration or MS cup, a bucket or large tub of water, or using the Winkler titration method.

3. Depth calibration is achieved by zeroing the sensor at the surface of the water at yourdeployment site.

4. Temperature calibration is factory-set, and does not require any recalibration.

The multiprobe has built-in checks for calibration acceptance. If the Calibration failed!message appears on your screen, it means that your calibration wasn’t accepted. Review thetable on the next page to locate any visual prompts which will appear next to or in place ofcertain parameter values.


3-6


TABLE 2: MULTIPROBE SOFTWARE SYMBOLS

slobmyS ?oduoydluohstahW?naemsihtseodtahW

)knalB(tneserptonseoddnaegnardetcepxenihtiwsignidaersihttahtsetacidnitI

.deriuqersiecivresoN.seilamonayna

A/N .dellatsnirosnesaevahtonseodretemarapsihT

#

foedistuositi,retemarapsihtrofnekatebtonnacgnidaerehttahtsetacidnitI.)ytilibapactnemerusaems'eborpitlumehtdnoyebrowoleb(egnarelbawolla

lliweborpitlumruoy;C˚06signirusaemerauoyerutarepmeteht,ecnatsniroF.#00.55:ngis#ahtiwgnidaererutarepmetmumixamehtyalpsid

?tcatnoC.desimorpmocroelbanoitseuqsiatadehttahtsetacidnitI

adanaCdnaaciremAfosetatSdetinUehtni(6673-949-008tabalordyH.1488-552)215(ro)ylno

*sinoitarbilac(retemarapsihtrofeulavtluafedehtsisihttahtsetacidnitI

tesotdeenuoytahtrednimerasiti,"emiT"retfasraeppatinehW.)deriuqer.egnahcyrettabkcolcaretfaemiteht

~

ehtkcehC.detasnepmoc-erutarepmettonsiretemarapsihttahtsetacidnIlobmyssihtfI.gnorwebyamgnihtemos,rosneserutarepmetruoyfonoitidnocgnidaerehttahtsnaemti,)romc/Sm(gnidaerdnoCpSehtybdeyalpsidsi

sihtevomeroT.ytivitcudnoc.e.i,dnoCpSdetasnepmocerutarepmet-nonsirednudohtemnoitasnepmocerutarepmetaylppaotdeenuoy,lobmys

mc/Sm:dnoCpS:dnoC:sretemaraP:puteS .noitcnuf3leveLasihcihw,)ro(

@rehtoretemaraprehtonarofdetasnepmoctonsignidaerehttahtsetacidnIrofdedeensiretemaraprehtotahwkcehcotdeenuoY.erutarepmetnaht

.)ytivitcudnocfostceffeehtrofdetasnepmocsil/gm.O.D.g.e(noitasnepmoc

Sensor identificationBefore you start, we recommend that you refer to figures 3-7 and 3-10, entitled “Sensor iden-tification” on the following pages to identify the sensors mounted on your multiprobe. Onceyou have defined your multiprobe’s sensor configuration, proceed according to the instructionsdetailed in the next sections.

How do I calibrate the multiprobe using a computer?Once you have serviced all sensors and established the interface between your computer(IBM compatible, Apple, or other personal computer) and the multiprobe, your computerwill start showing readings. When the readings stabilize (i.e. the effects of temperature andof other factors have disappeared), do the following:

In the Main Menu, move the cursor with the arrow keys to Calibrate and press ENTER. Youhave now on your computer screen all the sensors available on your multiprobe. Move the cursorto the parameter you want to calibrate and press ENTER. This parameter’s respective standard(s)or unit(s) will appear. You can now select the standard or unit that will best suit your needs. Thenext section, after the figures, will guide you through specific parameter calibration.

µS/cm

µS/cm


3-7


optionalsensorexpansionport plugs*

D.O. andconductivitysensor

pHelectrode

temperaturesensor

depth sensor’sseal screw**

!!WARNING

TO AVOID IRREPARABLE DAMAGE TO YOUR INSTRUMENT , INSERTA SENSOR EXPANSION PORT PLUG IN ANY VACANT SENSOR PORT.

circulator

* These sensor expansion ports are designed for installa-tion of optional sensors, such as ion-specific electrode,turbidity, etc.

** The seal screw may not be installed on your multiprobe.

Figure 3-7: Sensor identification(sensor cap end view, kit Ref. No. 013410)

Your sensor configuration may differ from this illustration, but your sensors will look like their representations below.

sensor endof the multiprobe

redoxelectrode

pH referenceand Teflonjunction

optional sensorexpansion port plug*


3-8


optionalsensorexpansionport plugs*


pHelectrode

temperaturesensor

depth sensor’sseal screw**

!!WARNING


circulator


** The seal screw may not be installed on your multiprobe.

Figure 3-8: Sensor identification(sensor cap end view, kit Ref. No. 013930)




optional sensorexpansion port plug*


3-9


Figure 3-9: Sensor identification(side view, kit Ref. No. 013410)

12345678123456781234567812345678

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789

1234567812345678123456781234567812345678

circulator

optional sensorexpansion port plugs*


temperaturesensor

!!WARNING



pH and redoxsensor,and referenceelectrode




3-10


Figure 3-10: Sensor identification(side view, kit Ref. No. 013930)

12345678123456781234567812345678

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789

1234567812345678123456781234567812345678

circulator

optional sensorexpansion port plugs*


temperaturesensor

!!WARNING



pH sensor



redoxplatinumband

Teflonjunction

fill hole


3-11


Hydrolab SensorFlex™ technology permits you to choose a multiprobe sensor configuration that meetsyour specific needs. Use this page (make copies, if you have several multiprobes) to label your multi-probe configuration on the figure below where the sensor expansion ports have been left blank.

Multiprobe serial number: ___________________Software revision number: ___________________Loader revision number: _____________________Last maintenance date: ______________________Last calibration date: ________________________

DataSonde 4 personalized configuration

temperaturesensor

depth sensor

1

2 3

4

56T

D


3-12


Hydrolab SensorFlex™ technology permits you to choose a multiprobe sensor configuration that meetsyour specific needs. Use this page (make copies, if you have several multiprobes) to label your multi-probe configuration on the figure below where the sensor expansion ports have been left blank.

Multiprobe serial number: ___________________Software revision number: ___________________Loader revision number: _____________________Last maintenance date: ______________________Last calibration date: ________________________

MiniSonde personalized configuration

temperaturesensor

depth sensor

1

2

3

4

T D


3-13

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: D.O.

3. Dissolved Oxygen

1234512345123451234512345123451234512345

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

123451234512345123451234512345123451234512345

11111111

121212121212121212

11111111

121212121212121212

1212121212121212

121212121212121212

1212121212121212

111111111

seal insertprobe collar

o-rings

Dissolvedoxygen sensor sensor housing

o-ring

FIGURE 3-11: D.O. SENSOR (SIDE VIEWS)

Maintenance

Dissolved oxygen (D.O.) sensor maintenance is usually required when calibration becomesimpossible or when the membrane covering the cell becomes wrinkled, bubbled, torn, dirty, orotherwise damaged. Follow a regular schedule for membrane replacement.

What do I need to service the D.O. sensor?

• Hydrolab’s MS/DS4 D.O. maintenance kit (Ref. No. 013430)• Deionized water• 1 pair of scissors or 1 pocket knife• 1 lint-free cloth

FIG. 3-13: D.O. SENSOR(SENSOR END VIEW)

femalesocket

male pin

FIG. 3-12: D.O.SENSOR(CONNECTOR END VIEW)

cathode

anode

o-ring


3-14


Steps to follow

STEP 1: Remove the o-ring securing the membrane. Shake out the old electrolyte.

STEP 2: Rinse the sensor cavity with deionized water. Refill with fresh D.O. electrolyte(provided in the maintenance kit, or use 2M KCl) until a perceptible meniscus of electrolyteforms above the entire electrode surface of the sensor. To remove any bubbles trapped in theelectrolyte, tap gently, on the side of the D.O. sensor.

STEP 3: To replace the membrane, hold both ends of a new membrane with both handsbetween your thumbs and index fingers. Hold the membrane above the top and carefully dropthe membrane over the top of the sensor.

STEP 4: Place the new o-ring over the gold cathode (use the old o-ring, if it is not damaged).Do not use any type of grease on the o-ring. Secure the membrane with the o-ring by pushingdown with your thumbs on both sides of the o-ring. Carefully trim the excess membraneextending below the o-ring with the pair of scissors or the pocket knife.

STEP 5: Allow the membrane to soak overnight in tap water before calibration.

Ele

ctro

o-ringmembrane

STEPS 2 STEP 3FIGURE 3-14 FIGURE 3-15

STEP 5FIGURE 3-17

STEP 4FIGURE 3-16

123412341234

123451234512345


3-15


Setup

The solubility of oxygen in water is a function of the conductivity of the water. This is acorrection that is applied to the DO mg/l parameter. This function is derived from the oxygenvs. chlorinity data in the 1985 edition of Standard Methods. The function for a specific con-ductance C (mS/cm) at a temperature T(°C) is:

F = 1 - C(3.439(10-3) + 0.361/(22.1 + T)2)

You can disable this compensation using the following steps:

STEP 1: Log-in to security level 3 and from the Main Menu, move the cursor to Setup andpress ENTER.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________STEP 2: Next, move the cursor to Parameters and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/16/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 12:55:57_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Then move the cursor to Oxygen and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/16/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 12:59:14_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters:

Temp Oxygen Cond Turbidity Depth100 * Ions-1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Move the cursor to DO:mg/l and press ENTER.


3-16


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/16/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 14:08:21_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Oxygen: DO%:Sat DO:mg/l BP:mmHg

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: You are now asked to enter either a 1 (On) or a 0 (off). Type a zero to disable thecompensation.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/16/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 14:13:42_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Oxygen: DO:mg/l:Salinity Compensation (1:On 0:Off):[1]«

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Note that the DO:mg/l parameter now is appended with an @ to indicate that the compensationhas been disabled. If you see a ? appended to the data, the multiprobe has become unable tooperate the DO sensor and the data is considered questionable.

After completing the appropriate changes or selecting the default values, you will receive aSetup completed! message and will be returned to the Main Menu.

Calibration

The following procedure will calibrate D.O., % saturation, or mg/l.

Calibration can be performed in the DS4 calibration cup or MS cup, a bucket or large tub ofwater, or using the Winkler titration method. A membrane is installed on your multiprobewhen it leaves the factory. Check if the membrane is properly installed (no wrinkles, tears, orbubbles). The Hydrolab membrane allows fast and accurate D.O. measurements.

If you have replaced the membrane, allow it to soak overnight in tap water before calibration.

What do I need to calibrate for dissolved oxygen readings?

• 1 lint-free cloth• 1 DS4 calibration cup (see figure 3-20)• 1 DS4 lid (see figure 3-18)


3-17




123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901

FIGURE 3-18: DATASONDE 4 LID

FIGURE 3-20: DATASONDE 4CALIBRATION CUP (SIDE VIEW)

FIGURE 3-19: MINISONDE CAP

FIGURE 3-21: MINISONDE CUP(SIDE VIEW)

• 1 MS cup (see figure 31)• 1 MS cap (see figure 29)


3-18


Steps to follow

STEP 1: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface, sensors pointing toward the ceiling, andinstall the DS4 calibration or MS cup. Fill the DS4 calibration or MS cup with tap water(specific conductance less than 0.5 mS/cm) until the water is just level with the o-ring used tosecure the D.O. membrane.

STEP 2: Carefully remove any water droplets from the D.O. membrane with the corner of thelint-free cloth.

STEP 3: Cover the DS4 calibration or MS cup with the inverted DS4 lid or MS cap. Allow afew minutes for D.O. readings to stabilize.

STEP 4: The sensor is ready for calibration once the readings on your display have stabilized.In the Main Menu, move the cursor with the arrow keys to Calibrate and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: First, move the cursor to Oxygen and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:

Temp Oxygen

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Next, leave the cursor on DO: %Sat and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Oxygen:

DO:%Sat DO:mg/l BP:mmHg

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Then, type the barometric pressure in millimeters of Mercury (mmHg) at your site and


3-19


press ENTER. Note that the last number typed will appear between brackets ([760.0] below).

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Oxygen: DO:%Sat:

Barometric pressure (mmHg):[760.0] <<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

To calibrate to a known D.O. concentration (for instance, a Winkler titration, or another D.O.instrument), follow the next steps:

NOTE: If you will be comparing your multiprobe readings with the Winkler titration results,

make sure that the conductivity driver has been installed on your multiprobe. This willtake care of the salinity compensation issue related to this specific calibration method.

STEP 1: Fill a bucket or large tub with deionized water. Immerse your instrument in thewater. Allow time for the liquid to stabilize and reach room temperature. Stabilization maytake several hours. Stirring the liquid may speed up the calibration process. Wait until thereadings have completely stabilized (to ±0.5 %Sat within one hour).

STEP 2: Take a sample from the bucket or tub. Proceed with your Winkler titration.

STEP 3: In the Main Menu, move the cursor with the arrow keys to Calibrate and pressENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Then, move the cursor to Oxygen, and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:

Temp Oxygen

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3-20


STEP 5: Next, move the cursor to DO:mg/l and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Oxygen:

DO:%Sat DO:mg/l BP:mmHG

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Next, type the barometric pressure in mmHg at your site and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Oxygen: DO:mg/l:

Barometric pressure (mmHg):[760.0] <<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Finally, type the known concentration, or the value in mg/l produced by the Winklertitration, after Standard: << and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Oxygen: DO:mg/l:

Standard:[8.33]<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Your D.O. sensor is now calibrated. Otherwise, repeat the procedure and refer to the “Quick cali-bration troubleshooting guidelines” (after depth calibration) and the “Troubleshooting” chapter.((SAME AS IN TDG CHPTR, 1ST NOTE ONLY!))

NOTES: The standard barometric pressure is 760 mmHg at sea level. Call your local weather

bureau or airport to find out the barometric pressure of your specific site. You canestimate this number using: BP = 760 - 2.5 (A/100), where A is your local altitudeabove sea level in feet. Also, if you are using the BP given by your local weatherbureau, be aware that their numbers are corrected to sea level, and you must use BP’,the uncorrected atmospheric pressure: BP’ = BP - 2.5 (A/100).

You can also use the built-in barometer in your Surveyor 4, carry a pocket barometer,or have one at your deployment site.


3-21

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: CONDUCTIVITY

4. Conductivity (sensor), specific conductance,resistivity, TDS, and salinity (parameters)

Maintenance

Hydrolab multiprobes now use a new sensor to measure conductivity. The sensor consists of apair of annular rings placed face to face inside a slot in the sensor housing. There is no longera removable cell block. The sensor may foul over time. To determine the appropriate mainte-nance intervals required for your deployment site, carry out a periodic visual inspection of thesensor, and compare your pre- and post-calibration results.

12341234123412341234123412341234

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

123451234512345123451234512345123451234512345

1212121212121212

111111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111


o-rings

sensor housing

FIGURE 3-23: CONDUCTIVITY SENSOR (SIDE VIEWS)

dissolved oxygen sensor

conductivity sensor


3-22


What do I need to service the conductivity sensor?

• Hydrolab’s MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit

Steps to follow

STEP 1: Use a small bottle brush with some mild detergent and water to clean the annularrings inside the slot in the sensor housing. Do not use sandpaper or any other abrasive to cleanthe sensor. Methanol and a cotton swab may be used to remove any films or deposits on theannular rings.

STEP 2: Rinse the sensor with deionized water to completely remove any soap film. Thesensor is now ready for calibration. (The 24-hour equilibration period is no longer required).

Calibration

Before you start, note that specific conductance ranges are divided to maximize measurementresolution as well as to enhance stability and performance. When calibrating specific conduc-tance, use a standard with a specific conductance as close to your field samples as possible. Forinstance, if the highest conductivity likely to be measured is 0.7 mS/cm, then you should calibratewith 0.005 M KCl (0.718 mS/cm). Higher or lower standards would not be appropriate.

femalesocket

male pin

FIG. 3-24: CONDUCTIVITY SENSOR(CONNECTOR END VIEW)


3-23


What do I need to calibrate for specific conductance readings?

• Deionized water• Specific conductance or salinity standard• 1 DS4 calibration cup• 1 DS4 cap• 1 MS cup• 1 MS cap

The conductivity sensor is based on a 0-100 mS/cm scale divided into 3 ranges: 0 to 1.5, 1.5 to15, and 15 to 100 mS/cm.

Unless you are practiced in quantitative preparations, or know someone who is, we recom-mend that you purchase prepared specific conductance standards. The table on the next pageshows several potassium chloride (KCl) solutions and their specific conductance values.((SAME NOTE BELOW AS TEXT IN “WHA T YOU NEED?” ON PAGE 3-5, UPDT WHEN CHGD))

NOTE: Conductivity calibration standards are available from Hydrolab. They are NIST-trace-

able and come in 946 ml bottles: 100 µmhos/cm (No. 013610), 500 µmhos/cm (No.013770), 1,412 µmhos/cm (No. 013620), 12,856 µmhos/cm (No. 013640), 47,600µmhos/cm (013650).

TABLE 3: SPECIFIC CONDUCTANCE VALUES

noitartnecnoCraloMICK mc/SmniecnatcudnoCcificepS

5.0 46.85

2.0 28.42

1.0 09.21

50.0 866.6

20.0 67.2

10.0 314.1

500.0 817.0

200.0 292.0

100.0 741.0

5000.0 470.0


3-24


Selecting conductance setup((SIMILAR IN “SELECTING COMP METH FOR SAL” ON PG 3-23, UPDT WHEN CHGD))Changin the setup configuration for specific conductance requires a password (it is a Level-3function). Unless you know why and what you are changing, we recommend that you move onto the “Calibration steps to follow” section on the following pages. The default setting forconductivity temperature compensation is fresh water.

Specific conductance readings are conductivity readings that are corrected (compensated) to25˚ C, regardless of the current measurement temperature, following the equation:Specific Conductance = conductivity x f(T) where the function f(T) is a nonlinear equationusing temperature (T) in ˚C as an input.

NOTE: You will need to have the conductivity driver revision 1.08 or higher in order to be able

to choose a computation method shown on the following pages. If you do not have theproper driver, please call Hydrolab Technical Support at 800-949-3766 (in the UnitedStates of America and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.

There are five functions available to compute specific conductance.

STEP 1: Log-in to Level 3 and in the Main Menu, move the cursor to Setup and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Next, move the cursor to Parameters and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Then, move the cursor to Cond and press ENTER.


3-25


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters:

Temp Oxygen Cond

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Now, either leave the cursor on SpCond:mS/cm and press ENTER, or move the cursorto SpCond:µS/cm and press ENTER. We selected SpCond:mS/cm.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Cond:

SpCond:mS/cm SpCond:µS/cm Res:kΩ-cm Sal:ppt TDS:g/l

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: You are now prompted to select the function you want to use to compute specificconductance.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Cond: SpCond:mS/cm:

Cond Temp Comp (1:Fresh 2:Salt 3:StdMth 4:None 5:Custom):[1]<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The first one is based on Hydrolab’s freshwater temperature compensation function. This isthe function selected when shipped from the factory. This function is derived from 0.01N KCl:f(T) = c

1T5 + c

2T4 + c

3T3 + c

4T2 + c

5T + c

6 where c

1 = 1.4326 x 10-9, c

2 = -6.0716 x 10-8, c

3= -1.0665 x 10-5, c

4 = 1.0943 x 10-3, c

5 = -5.3091 x 10-2, c

6 = 1.8199.

To select this function, type a 1 after the prompt above.

The second method is based on Hydrolab’s saltwater compensation function. This function isbased on standard seawater: f(T) = c

1T7 + c

2T6 + c

3T5 + c

4T4 + c

5T3 + c

6T2 + c

7T + c

8where c

1 = 1.2813 x 10-11, c

2 = -2.2129 x 10-9, c

3 = 1.4771 x 10-7, c

4 = -4.6475 x 10-6,

c5 = 5.6170 x 10-5, c

6 = 8.7699 x 10-4, c

7 =-6.1736 x 10-2, c

8 =1.9524.

To select this function, type a 2 after the prompt above.

The third option relies on the function outlined in section 2510 of “Standard Methods for theExamination of Water and Wastewater”, 18th edition. This method uses the following func-tion: f(T) = 1/(1 + 0.0191(T - 25)).To select this function, type a 3 after the prompt above.

The fourth choice will remove any temperature compensation, so that the readings are equiva-lent to conductivity: f(T) = 1.To select this function, type a 4 after the prompt above.

Finally, type a 5 after the prompt above to choose the fifth and last function which is a customfunction and which will give you a compensation function that you can define according to thefollowing function: f(T) = aT7 + bT6 + cT5 + dT4 + eT3 + fT2 + gT + h. The coefficients a


3-26


through h are entered in the Setup:Sensors:Cond:SpCond:mS/cm submenu. Due to the nature ofthe change, you will need to first enter security level 3 in order to have access to the Sensorssubmenu. Here is a representation of the screen when you are at the SpCond:mS/cm submenulevel and are prompted to enter the different coefficients. Press ENTER to accept defaults.

For coefficient a:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Sensors: Cond: SpCond:mS/cm:a:[1.2813E-11]<<__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

For coefficient b:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Sensors: Cond: SpCond:mS/cm:b:[-2.2129E-9]<<__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

For coefficient c:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Sensors: Cond: SpCond:mS/cm:c:[1.4771E-7]<<__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

For coefficient d:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Sensors: Cond: SpCond:mS/cm:

d:[-4.6475E-6]<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________For coefficient e:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Sensors: Cond: SpCond:mS/cm:

e:[5.6170E-5]<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________For coefficient f:


f:[8.7699E-4]<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________For coefficient g:


g:[-6.1736E-2]<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3-27


For coefficient h:


h:[1.9524]<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If your function does not require all terms in the function on the previous page, remove theterms by entering a zero for the corresponding coefficient when prompted. Values such as 1.25x 10-9 are entered as 1.25E-9. You can check your entries (if you have the multiprobe softwarerevision 1.36 or higher) by reentering the above submenu and looking at the value in brackets.Pressing ENTER without typing a value will select the value that is between brackets.

Next, you are asked to select an operating range for the conductivity sensor.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/13/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 12:40:34_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Cond: SpCond:mS/cm:Set Range (1:Auto 2:High 3:Mid 4:Low):[1]«

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The first choice (the default choice) allows the multiprobe to automatically select the mostappropriate range to measure conductivity. The multiprobe will dynamically change the rangebased on the current measurement conditions over 0 - 100 mS/cm. The resolution of the dis-played data will also change to accommodate the current range in use.

The remaining choices force the multiprobe to measure conductivity using a fixed range. Ifyou select the low range, the readings will indicate an over-ranged condition for values above1.5 mS/cm. The Mid range will over-range at 15 mS/cm. These choices also force the dis-played readings to a fixed point or constant resolution format primarily only needed for certainSDI-12 data loggers. Otherwise, it is best to always select the Auto choice as this gives the bestaccuracy and performance for the conductivity sensor.


Selecting a computation method for salinity((SIMILAR IN “SELECTING COMP METH FOR SP CON” ON PG 3-20, UPDT WHEN CHGD))Selecting a computation method for salinity requires a password (it is a Level-3 function).Unless you know why and what you are changing, we recommend that you do not change thesalinity setup. The default setting for the salinity computation method is Paper 2311.


3-28


The salinity parameter can also now be computed based on a user selection of one of twoalgorithms by entering the Setup:Parameters:Cond:Sal:ppt submenu as follows:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Cond: Sal:ppt:

Salinity Method (1:2311 2:StdMth):[1]<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Then, either enter a 1 or a 2. If you enter 1, salinity will be computed using an algorithmadapted from the United States Geological Survey Water-Supply Paper 2311 titled “SpecificConductance: Theoretical Considerations and Application to Analytical Quality Control”. Thisis the default method as shipped from the factory and has been used by Hydrolab since May of1991. This salinity function is only defined from salinities in the 30 to 40 ppt range (mildconcentrations and dilutions of sea water). This salinity function uses specific conductancevalues C in mS/cm compensated using the function you have selected above.

Salinity = c1C4 + c

2C3 + c

3C2 + c

4C + c

5 where c

1 = 5.9950 x 10-8, c

2 = -2.3120 x 10-5, c

3 =

3.4346 x 10-3, c4 = 5.3532 x 10-1, c

5 = -1.5494 x 10-2.

If you enter a 2, the salinity will be computed using the Practical Salinity Scale (1978). Thisalgorithm is defined for salinities ranging from 2 to 42 ppt and uses conductivity values cor-rected to 15 ˚C, regardless of the compensation function selected for specific conductance.This algorithm is described in section 2520B of “Standard Methods for the Examination ofWater and Wastewater”, 18th edition. This driver does not implement the 0-40 extension or thepressure correction.

For both choices, you will receive a Setup completed! message and will be returned to the MainMenu. If you do not receive this message, repeat the selection procedure and make sure youenter either 1 or 2 and no other number.

Calibration steps to follow

Conductivity requires a two-point calibration. You need to calibrate your sensor to zero andthen to the slope buffer you are using. Refer to figures 36 to 40 on the following pages, whencalibrating conductivity.

STEP 1: Make sure that the sensor is clean. Screw the DS4 calibration or MS cup onto themultiprobe. Have the DS4 calibration or MS cup handy.

STEP 2: Fill the DS4 calibration or MS cup half-full with deionized water. Place the DS4 orMS cap on top of the cup. Shake the multiprobe to rinse. Repeat.

STEP 3: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface, sensors pointing toward the ceiling.Remove the DS4 or MS cap and cup. Dry the inside of the conductivity sensor slot thoroughly.


3-29






__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: Next, move the cursor to Cond and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:

Temp Oxygen Cond

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Choose the appropriate unit or standard. The choices are: mS/cm or µS/cm forspecific conductance, kΩ-cm for resistivity, ppt for salinity, and g/l for TDS. Let’s chooseSpCond:mS/cm and then press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Cond:

SpCond:mS/cm SpCond:µS/cm Res:kΩ-cm Sal:ppt TDS:g/l

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Type 0 when prompted to enter the specific conductance standard, then press ENTER.The number between brackets [ ] represents the last value you entered and will be used again ifyou just press ENTER without typing a value.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:Cond: SpCond:mS/cm:

Enter Spcond standard (mS/cm): [0.0]0<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 8: You will get a Calibration completed! message and you will shortly be returned tothe Main Menu. You have finished the first calibration point, now let’s move to the slopecalibration.

STEP 9: Screw the DS4 calibration cup or MS cup on the multiprobe. In a similar manner,rinse the sensors twice with a small portion of the specific conductance or salinity standardsthat you will use for calibration. Discard the rinse each time.


3-30


STEP 10: Fill the cup with the conductivity standard to a point just above the D.O. cell. To avoidtrapping bubbles inside the conductivity sensor slot, pour the standard down the side of the cup.

STEP 11: Allow time (1-3 minutes) for the readings to stabilize. Once they have stabilized,the sensor is ready for calibration.

STEP 12: In the Main Menu, move the cursor with the arrow keys to Calibrate and press ENTER.

STEP 13: Next, go to Cond and press ENTER.

STEP 14: Choose the same unit or standard used to set the zero point - for this example, wechose SpCond:mS/cm - and press ENTER.

STEP 15: Type the value of your standard (1.413 mS/cm for specific conductance in theexample below) and press ENTER.

STEP 16: The Calibration completed! message will appear. You will be returned to the MainMenu. You can now see that the specific conductance reading is calibrated and displayed as1.413. Any asterisk after the reading has been removed.




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Time Temp DO SpCondHH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat mS/cm

23:11:15 24.59 48.3 1.41323:11:16 24.59 48.3 1.413

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 17: If you make a mistake, an error message will appear on your screen and you will bereturned to the Main Menu screen:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Cond: SpCond:mS/cm:

Calibration failed...

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Repeat the procedure and enter the correct unit or standard. Your conductivity sensor is nowcalibrated. Otherwise, repeat the procedure and refer to the “Quick calibration troubleshootingguidelines” (after depth calibration) and the “Troubleshooting” chapter.


3-31


Deionized

Water

STEP 2FIG. 3-25*

1212

1212

* Note: If you are using a MiniSonde, you can substitute the MiniSonde cap where theDataSonde 4 calibration cap is used.

STEP 9FIG. 3-26

Specific

orSalinity

standa

1212

1212

12345123451234512345

1234512345123451234512345

12341234

1234512345

1234123412341234

12345123451234512345

123412341234

123412341234


3-32


Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 0Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23

______________________________________________________________________________________________________Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select...

HL Login Setup Calibrate Files Software___________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Time Temp ORP pH SpCond DO Depth

HH:MM:SS C mV Units mS/cm %Sat meters23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3 25.00

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3 25.00

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3 25.00

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48 3 25__________________________

STEP 12-16FIGURE 3-29

STEP 10 STEP 11FIG. 3-27 FIG. 3-28

Specific

orSalinity

standa

12341234

12341234

12341234

12341234


3-33

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: PH

femalesocket

male pin

FIG. 3-33: PH SENSOR(CONNECTOR END VIEW)

seal insertsensor housingelectrodes probe collar

123451234512345123451234512345123451234512345

1111111

111111111

1111111

121212121212121212

1111111

121212121212121212

1111111

121212121212121212

o-rings

FIGURE 3-30: PH SENSOR* (SIDE VIEW, KIT REF. NO. 013410)

NOTE:* If you have chosen this sensor, your multiprobe may be equipped with either a pH sensor and a pH

reference or a redox/ORP sensor, a pH sensor, and a pH reference electrode.

FIGURE 3-32: PH AND REFERENCE(ELECTRODES SENSOR END VIEW)

5. pH

seal insert

Teflon junctionpH sensor probe collar

123451234512345123451234512345123451234512345

11111111

111111111

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

o-rings

FIGURE 3-31: PH SENSOR* (SIDE VIEW, KIT REF. NO. 013930)

redoxplatinum band

fill hole


pH electrode


pH electrode

OR

KIT REF. NO. 013410 KIT REF. NO. 013930


3-34


Maintenance

What do I need to service the pH sensor?

• Hydrolab’s MS/DS4 pH maintenance kit (Ref. No. 013410 or 013930)• Methanol• Soap• Cotton balls, cotton swabs, or a very clean, soft, nonabrasive cloth

pH glass electrode maintenance

The pH glass electrode requires maintenance when obviously coated with oil, sediment, orbiological growth. Slow response or non-reproducible measurements are signs that the elec-trode has become coated or was scratched.

Steps to follow

STEP 1: Wet a cotton ball or swab, or a clean, soft, non-scratching cloth with methanol.Carefully clean the pH glass electrode. This procedure will help remove any film on the glassand restore the speed of response.

STEP 2: Rinse the electrode with deionized water.

Steps to follow for standard pH reference electrode maintenance (kitRef. No. 013410)

STEP 1: Unscrew the Teflon junction. Pour out the old electrolyte (see figures 3-34 to 3-36on the following pages).

STEP 2: Use the hypodermic syringe to refill the reference electrode housing to the top withstandard electrolyte which is provided in the maintenance kit (3M KCl saturated with silverchloride). Rinse once first. Make sure that no bubbles are trapped in the reference electrodehousing after it has been filled.

STEP 3: Use a standard screwdriver to screw the Teflon junction back on.((SIMILAR IN CAL. & PREVIOUS SECTION, UPDT WHEN CHGD))Air and electrolyte should emerge through the Teflon junction. If this is not the case, repeatsteps 1 and 2. If the second attempt fails, replace the old junction with the spare provided in theMS/DS4 pH maintenance kit. You need to insert the small blue o-ring (provided with theTeflon junction) over the junction before screwing it on the sensor.


3-35


1212

1212

123456789123456789123456789123456789

12345678123456781234567812345678

123456789123456789123456789123456789

STEP 2FIG. 3-35

syringe

reference electrodehousing

syringe

1212

1212

other sensors and accessories

123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789sensor end

of the multiprobe

Teflon junctionSTEP 1FIG. 3-34

1

2

12

3


3-36


Steps to follow for standard pH reference electrode maintenance (kitRef. No. 013930)

STEP 1: Pull off the Teflon junction sleeve. Pour out the old electrolyte (see figures 3-37 to3-40 on the following pages).

STEP 2: Point the multiprobe sensors toward the floor and push the sleeve partially over thepH sensor. Make sure the electrolyte fill hole is not blocked.

STEP 3: Use the hypodermic syringe to completely fill the Teflon junction sleeve through thefill hole with standard electrolyte provided in the maintenance kit (3M KCl saturated withsilver chloride).((SIMILAR IN CAL. & PREVIOUS SECTION, UPDT WHEN CHGD))

STEP 4: Point the multiprobe sensors toward the ceiling and push the Teflon junction sleevethe rest of the way onto the pH sensor body.

Air and electrolyte should emerge through the Teflon junction. If this is not the case, repeatsteps 1, 2 and 3. If the second attempt fails, replace the old junction with the spare provided inthe MS/DS4 pH maintenance kit.

((REMOVED LISREF SECTION, SEE “DS4 PSTRV” & PLACE HERE WHEN READY))


123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789


Teflon junctionSTEP 3FIG. 3-36 1 2


3-37


STEP 1FIG. 3-37

STEP 2FIG. 3-38


123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789sensor end

of the multiprobe

1

2

Teflon junction sleeve

123456789123456789123456789123456789

1234567812345678123456781234567812345678

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789

fill hole


3-38


STEP 4FIG. 3-40

STEP 3FIG. 3-39

syringe

12345678123456781234567812345678

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789

123456789123456789123456789123456789123456789


3-39


Calibration

pH calibration is accomplished by filling the DS4 calibration cup or MS cup, first with the“zero” buffer (value between 6.8 and 7.2) and then with a “slope” buffer with a pH near that ofthe anticipated samples that you will be measuring (but not between 6.8 and 7.2). Once thereading has stabilized, follow the calibration procedure for each buffer.

What do I need to calibrate for pH readings?

• Deionized water• 4, 7, and 10 pH buffers (see notes below)• 1 DS4 calibration cup• 1 MS cup

((SAME AT BEG. OF THIS CHAPTER ON PAGE 3-2, UPDATE WHEN CHGED))NOTES: A powder pH buffer kit is available from Hydrolab. This kit includes dry pH buffer

powders for mixing pH calibration solutions. Powders for 4, 7, and 10 buffers, plus three50 ml bottles (for dilution with deionized water) are included in the kit (No. 013630).

pH calibration solutions are also available from Hydrolab. They are NIST-traceable andcome in 473 ml bottles. pH solutions 4 (No. 013660), 7 (No.013670), and 10 (No. 013680).

Steps to follow

STEP 1: Screw the DS4 calibration cup or MS cup on. Thoroughly rinse the sensors withdeionized water. Repeat.

STEP 2: Rinse the sensor with a small amount of the 7 pH buffer (or whatever “zero” buffer- 6.8 to 7.2). Discard the liquid. Secure your multiprobe to the work surface.

STEP 3: Fill the calibration cup or MS cup with the 7 pH buffer (or “zero” buffer - 6.8 to 7.2)to a point just above the D.O. cell. Allow time (1-3 minutes) for the solution to stabilize.





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3-40


STEP 5: Next, move the cursor to Ions-1 and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:

Temp Cond Oxygen Ions-1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Then, leave the cursor on pH:Units and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1:

pH:Units ORP:mV NH4+:mg/l-N NH4Tot:mg/l-N NO3-:mg/l-N NH4+:mV NO3-:mV

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Now, type 7 (or “zero” buffer - 6.8 to 7.2) after standard: <<, followed by ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1: pH/Units

Enter standard:[7.0]7<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 8: Thoroughly rinse the sensors with deionized water. Discard the liquid. Repeat.

STEP 9: Rinse the sensors with a small amount of the pH buffer that will be similar to the pHof your sample site. Discard the liquid. Then, fill the calibration cup or MS cup with thisbuffer to a point just above the D.O. cell. Allow time (1-3 minutes) for the readings to stabilize.





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3-41


STEP 11: Next, move the cursor to Ions and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 12: Then, leave the cursor on pH:Units and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________STEP 13: Now, type the value of the slope buffer after standard: <<, followed by ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1: pH/Units:

Enter standard:[7.0](Slope buffer value)<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Your pH sensor is now calibrated. Otherwise, repeat the procedure and refer to the “Quick cali-bration troubleshooting guidelines” (after depth calibration) and the “Troubleshooting” chapter.


3-42

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: REDOX

seal insertsensor housingelectrodes probe collar

123451234512345123451234512345123451234512345

11111111

121212121212121212

11111111

121212121212121212

1212121212121212

121212121212121212

1212121212121212

111111111

o-rings

FIGURE 3-41: REDOX SENSOR* (SIDE VIEW, KIT REF. NO. 013410)

seal insert

Teflon junctionpH sensor probe collar

123451234512345123451234512345123451234512345

11111111

11111111

11111111

121212121212121212

11111111

121212121212121212

11111111

121212121212121212

o-rings

FIGURE 3-42: REDOX SENSOR* (SIDE VIEW, KIT REF. NO. 013930)

redoxplatinum band

fill hole

6. Redox

NOTE:* If you have chosen this sensor, your multiprobe may be equipped with either a pH sensor and a pH

reference or a redox/ORP sensor, a pH sensor, and a pH reference electrode.

femalesocket

male pin

FIG. 3-45: REDOX SENSOR(CONNECTOR END VIEW)

redox electrode

FIGURE 3-43: REDOX SENSOR (SENSOR END VIEW)


redox platinum band

OR

KIT REF. NO. 013930KIT REF. NO. 013410



3-43


Maintenance

Generally, the redox sensor requires maintenance only when obviously coated with oil, sedi-ment, or biological growth.

What do I need to service the redox sensor?

• Hydrolab’s MS/DS4 pH maintenance kit (Ref. No. 013410 or 013930)• Deionized water• Methanol• Cotton balls, cotton swabs, or one very clean, soft, nonabrasive cloth• 1 very mild abrasive, such as toothpaste, jeweler’s rouge, or a fine polishing strip

Steps to follow

STEP 1: Wet a cotton ball or swab, or the very clean, soft, nonabrasive cloth with methanol.Carefully clean the redox electrode. This procedure will help remove any films on the plati-num tip and restore the speed of response.

STEP 2: To remove discoloration on the platinum tip or band of the redox electrode, polish itwith the very mild abrasive (e.g. jewelers rouge or a polishing strip). Rinse with deionizedwater. Be careful not to scratch the nearby pH glass electrode.

STEP 3: Soak the electrode overnight in tap water to allow the platinum surface to restabilizebefore calibration.

NOTE: As long as the platinum tip or band of the redox sensor and the reference electrode are

kept properly serviced, you may not need to check the redox system calibration fre-quently.

Since the redox sensor uses the pH reference electrode, when servicing the redox sensor, werecommend that you also carry out the standard pH reference electrode maintenance procedure(see the pH maintenance and calibration section of this chapter for details).((DELETED LISREF , PLACE HERE WHEN READY))

Calibration

The redox calibration procedure is performed by completing the following steps.


3-44


What do I need to calibrate for redox readings?

• Deionized water• Quinhydrone or another redox standard• 4 and 7 pH buffers (for preparation of your redox standard)

Steps to follow

Redox standard preparation: Dissolve four grams of quinhydrone in 500 ml of 4.0 and 7.0 pHbuffers. You can also use another redox standard.

NOTE: Redox calibration solutions are also available from Hydrolab. The first solution is Zobell’s

solution (473 ml bottle, No. 013860) and is APHA-approved. The second one is Light’ssolution (473 ml bottle, No. 013870) and is APHA- and ASTM-approved.

STEP 1: Thoroughly rinse the sensors with deionized water. Discard the liquid. Repeat.

STEP 2: Rinse with a small amount of the redox standard. Discard the liquid. Then, fill theDS4 calibration cup or MS cup with this standard to a point above the D.O. cell. Allow time (1-3 minutes) for the standard to stabilize. Note the temperature.





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: First, move the cursor to Ions-1 and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3-45


STEP 5: Next, move the cursor to ORP:mV and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Then, type the appropriate value from the table below or off the label of your redoxstandard after Standard:[0.0]<< and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1: ORP:mV:

Standard:[0.0](value)<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TABLE 4: QUINHYDRONE REDOX VALUES

* These redox values are reported based on the Normal Hydrogen Electrode (NHE) reference, and should only be used when you are calibrating your sensor with a Redox standard prepared with Quinhydrone.

STEP 7: Thoroughly rinse the sensors with deionized water. Repeat.

STEP 8: To check for linearity, rinse with a second redox standard. Discard the liquid. Then,fill the DS4 calibration cup or MS cup with this standard to a point just above the D.O. cell.Allow time (1-3 minutes) for the standard to stabilize. Note the temperature.

STEP 9: Verify that the value falls within 20 mV of the value in the table above or of theexpected value for the redox standard that you are using.

NOTES: Select a standard value and temperature near that of your field samples. As long as the platinum tip of the redox sensor and the reference electrode are kept

properly serviced, you may not need to check the redox system calibration frequently.

Your redox sensor is now calibrated. Otherwise, repeat the procedure and refer to the “Quickcalibration troubleshooting guidelines” (after depth calibration) and the “Troubleshooting” chapter.

F˚86roC˚02K51.392ro

roF˚77roC˚52K51.892

roF˚68roC˚03K51.303

7foreffubHp Vm592 Vm582 Vm572

4foreffubHp Vm074 Vm264 Vm454


3-46

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: TEMPERATURE

Maintenance

Keep the thermistor tube clean (no barnacles or other deposits). Otherwise, the temperaturesensor does not require any maintenance.

Calibration

Temperature does not require any calibration. This sensor is factory-calibrated.

TABLE 5: TEMPERATURE CONVERSION

7. Temperature

FIG. 3-46: TEMPERATURE SENSOR*(SIDE VIEW)

FIG. 3-47: TEMPERATURE SENSOR*(SENSOR END VIEW)

* This sensor is not removable.

morF oT suisleC tiehnerhaF nivleK

suisleC 123+)5/9(C˚

F˚77=C˚52.g.e51.372+C˚

K51.892=C˚52.g.e

tiehnerhaF)9/5(23-F˚

F˚52=F˚77.g.e1

)9/5(76.954+F˚K51.892=F˚77.g.e

nivleK51.372-K

C˚52=K51.892.g.e76.954-)5/9(K

F˚77=K51.892.g.e1


3-47

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: DEPTH

123451234512345123451234512345

12341234123412341234123412341234

8. Depth

FIG. 3-48: DEPTH SENSOR* (SIDE VIEW)

FIG. 3-49: DEPTH SENSOR*(END VIEW)

FIG. 3-50: DEPTH SENSOR’SSEAL SCREW**

MaintenanceYour multiprobe may be equipped with one of the following depth options: 0 to 10 meters (33feet), 0 to 25, 0 to 100, and 0 to 200 meters (82, 328, and 656 feet). The first option is oftenused to detect level changes, for instance during tidal flows or rainfalls, and automaticallycompensates for barometric pressure changes by using a vent tube on the fixed cable. Thesecond, third, and fourth options are usually used to determine the depth in the water column atwhich the other parameter readings are made.

! WARNING: The 0-10 meter vented depth sensor should be protected fromdepths over 15 meters (49 feet) by installing the seal screw (pro-vided in the MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit) in the face of themultiprobe sensor cap. Likewise, the 0-25 depth sensor shouldbe protected from depths over 50 meters (164 feet) by installingthe same seal screw. However, the 100- and 200-meter depthsensors do not require installation of the seal screw.

* This sensor is not removable. The sensor is located inside the multiprobe and is not visible from the outside.** The seal screw may not be installed on your multiprobe.


3-48


! WARNING: The multiprobe maximum immersion depth is 225 meters (738 feet).

Generally, the depth sensor does not need any maintenance. But if you notice any deposits(calcium, biological growth, etc.) forming in the port, squirt a very weak acid (such as aceticacid) into the port with a hypodermic syringe. You can also use a cotton swab. Rinse withdeionized water. Discard the liquid. Repeat.

Calibration((SAME AS IN ASSBLY, EX. 3, UPDATE WHEN CHANGED))Calibration is carried out by entering zero for the standard at your deployment site, or at thelaboratory (if the barometric pressure at the laboratory is the same as that of the field site) tocancel the effect of changes in barometric pressure.

Steps to follow

If the seal screw is installed, you need to remove it before calibration.





__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: First, move the cursor to Depth25 (or any other depth option) and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:

Temp Cond Oxygen Depth25

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


3-49


STEP 3: Next, move the cursor to Dep25:meters, Dep25:feet, or Dep25:psi and select the unityou want to use. Let’s choose Dep25:meters and then press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Depth25:

Dep25:meters Dep25:feet Dep25:psi

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Finally, type 0 after Enter xero value: [0.0]<< and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Depth25: Dep25:Meters

Enter zero value: [0.0]0<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Your depth sensor is now calibrated. Otherwise, repeat the procedure and refer to the “Quickcalibration troubleshooting guidelines” (on the next page) and the “Troubleshooting” chapter.


3-50


9. Quick calibration troubleshooting guidelinesIf you notice a problem in calibration, try the following basic troubleshooting tips:

1. Check your Parameter submenu (under: Setup:Display). The parameter unit displayedon the data header should match the unit chosen for calibration.

2. Make sure that you have entered the correct units for each parameter reading.

3. Verify that the standards used have not been contaminated.

4. Make sure the equipment and solutions are at the correct temperature for the calibra-tion being performed.

5. Check your logs to see when the last maintenance was done. It may be time to serviceyour sensors.

6. Clean all sensors, except D.O., with 3% hydrogen peroxide (H2O

2). Rinse them with

deionized water. Discard the liquid. Repeat.

7. Make sure that no bubbles are trapped in the D.O. membrane or the slot in the conduc-tivity sensor. To avoid trapping bubbles while calibrating, slightly tilt the multiprobeand pour the solutions down the side of the DS4 calibration cup or MS cup.

8. Verify that you have removed all storage or protection caps. These caps will corrupt orprevent readings.

9. Check the multiprobe housing and sensors for physical damage (cracked or bent elec-trodes, wrinkled or cut membranes) and fouling (tarnished, soiled, or otherwise coatedelectrodes).

10. Check the multiprobe battery voltage in the Main Menu (DS4 size C alkaline batter-ies, MS size AA alkaline batteries), it should be reading between 5 and 15 volts.

11. For additional information, please refer to chapter 6 of this manual and “Appendices”.

12. If you do not notice any improvement, call Hydrolab’s technical support at: 800-949-3766 (in the United States of America and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.


3-51


10. How to maintain and service your multiprobe andits accessories

When do I need to service(1) or maintain(2) the multiprobe?

• When you have stored your multiprobe for a certain period of time.• When you have deployed your multiprobe and notice fouling.• When it is time for its scheduled maintenance.

What can I easily service and replace on my own?

• The multiprobe housing (when dirty) (1)• Multiprobe accessories (1) (2)• Peripheral items (e.g. protective plugs, some seals, etc.) (1) (2)• Internal and external batteries (1) (2)

What do I need to service my equipment?

• Deionized water• Methanol or alcohol• Soap• 1 cleaning brush• 1 DS4 calibration cup with 1 lid (see figures 3-51 and 3-53, on the following page)• 1 DS4 storage cup (see figure 3-53, on the following page)• 1 MS cup (see figure 3-54, on the following page)• 1 MS cap (see figure 3-52, on the following page)• Hydrolab’s carrying case or 1 large plastic container• Replacement batteries: 8 alkaline size C for the DS4, 4 or 8 alkaline size AA for the MS,

and 1 lithium (Panasonic® reference: CR 2032, or equivalent) for each multiprobe.• Silicone grease (provided in the MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit)• 1 Allen wrench (provided in the MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit)• 1 spanner wrench (provided in the MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit)• 1 pair of plastic tweezers• 1 standard screwdriver• Loctite™ 242 threadlocker (or equivalent)


3-52


123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901123456789012345678901

FIGURE 3-51: DATASONDE 4 LID

FIGURE 3-53: DATASONDE 4 CALIBRA-TION AND STORAGE CUP (SIDE VIEW)

(The calibration cup is the storage cupwith its bottom removed)

FIGURE 3-52: MINISONDE CAP

FIGURE 3-54: MINISONDE CUP(SIDE VIEW)

The multiprobe

Besides normal maintenance of the sensors and the internal batteries, clean the outside of yourmultiprobe housing using a cleaning brush, soap, and water. Always use the DS4 storage cupor the MS cup (filled with one inch of tap water) to protect the sensors from damage, andespecially from drying out, whenever the multiprobe is not deployed.

Do not expose your equipment to extreme temperatures (below 1 ˚C or 34 ˚F or above 50 ˚C or122 ˚F) when going to or coming back from your deployment site, or when storing your multi-probe. Note that the multiprobe operating temperature is -5 ˚C (23 ˚F) to 50 ˚C (122 ˚F). Toprevent the sensors from freezing, fill the cup with half an inch of tap water and half an inch ofalcohol. Rinse with deionized water before calibration or deployment. In warmer weather, toprevent the sensors from dehydrating, fill the cup with one inch of clean tap water.

The multiprobe maximum immersion depth is 225 meters (738 feet).

Always rinse the multiprobe with clean tap water soon after returning from deployment.


3-53

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: DRYER

The dryer

The in-line vented level dryer is a part of the cable and penetrator assembly, if your multiprobehas the vented depth sensor (0-10 meters).

The GORE-TEX® patch (round patch on the dryer) allows gases to come into the dryer withoutany water leaks. Any water leaks inside the dryer can block the tube which goes to the multi-probe. If you notice any water leaks, call Hydrolab at 800-949-3766 (in the United States ofAmerica and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.

The dryer contains desiccant bag(s) (white bag) to keep condensation from forming inside thevented tube which goes from the dryer to the multiprobe. Should you detect moisture insidethe dryer, follow the next steps to replace the bag(s). We recommend that you refer to figures3-55 to 3-57 below and on the next page.

STEP 1: Unscrew both dryer nuts.

STEP 2: Unscrew the dryer cap.

STEP 3: Look at the indicator stripe on the desiccant bag(s). If the stripe is dark blue, yourbag(s) will not need to be replaced. If the stripe is light pink or purple, remove, discard, andreplace the old bag(s).

STEP 4: To reassemble the dryer, screw the dryer cap and both dryer nuts.

STEP 1 FIGURE 3-55: PENETRATOR WITH DRYER

12121212

12121212

123123123123123123123123123123

12

12

dryer

GORE-TEX® patch

dryer nuts (2)

dryer cap penetrator

multiprobe


3-54

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: DRYER



12341234123412341234123412341234123412341234

123

123

dryer cap

123123123123123123123123123123

123

123123

old desiccant bag

DO

NO

T E

AT

KE

EP

INC

ON

TA

INE

R_

__

new desiccant bag

DO

NO

T E

AT

KE

EP

INC

ON

TA

INE

R_

__

indicator stripe(on back of desiccant bag)


3-55

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: CIRCULATOR

123412341234123412341234123412341234

1212121212121212

111111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

11111111

11111111

seal insert

circulatorhousing

impeller probe collar

o-rings

FIGURE 3-58: CIRCULATOR (SIDE VIEW)

FIG. 3-59: CIRCULATOR(TOP VIEW)

impeller

FIG. 3-60: CIRCULATOR(ENLARGED SIDE VIEW)

impeller

The FreshFlow™ miniature sample circulator

! CAUTION: The circulator impeller contains two magnets.To prevent damage, we recommend keeping diskettes orsimilar computer components away from the circulator’simpeller.

femalesocket

male pin

FIG. 3-61: CIRCULATOR(CONNECTOR END VIEW)

retainingscrew

retainingscrew


3-56

MAINTENANCE, CALIBRATION , AND STORAGE: CIRCULATOR

What do I need to service the circulator?

• 1 spanner wrench (provided in the MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit)• 1 small soft bristle brush (provided in the MS/DS4 pH maintenance kit)• 1 pair of plastic tweezers

Steps to follow

STEP 1: If the circulator is clogged with twigs or other small debris, you can clean theimpeller in some tap water using a soft bristle brush. You can also use a pair of tweezers toremove the debris. Rinse with tap water.

STEP 2: If there is excessive build-up on the impeller, you can remove the retaining screw toclean the build-up. After cleaning the impeller, and before inserting the retaining screw, apllya very small amount of Loctite™ 242 threadlocker (or equivalent) on the tip of the screw. Thescrew will not “bottom out” (see figure 64 on the previous page). Do not overtighten the screw.

! CAUTION: If you do not use the circulator, you can turn it off by accessingthe System System System System System submenu and turning the circulator off.

The batteries

For internal battery replacement (8 size C alkaline batteries for the DS4 and 4 or 8 size AAalkaline batteries for the MiniSonde), refer to chapter 5, under “Internal battery replacement.”

For lithium battery replacement (for both multiprobes), refer to chapter 7, under “Multiprobelithium battery replacement.”


3-57


11. Storage recommendations

Multiprobe and sensor storage

! WARNING: If you do not use a sensor, insert an optional sensor expansion portplug in the vacant sensor expansion port to prevent any contami-nation or damage during maintenance, operation, or storage.

Fill the DS4 storage cup or MS cup with one inch of clean tap water and screw the cup on themultiprobe. In freezing weather, fill the cup with half an inch of tap water and half an inch ofalcohol.

If your multiprobe is equipped with batteries (8 size C for the DataSonde 4 and 4 or 8 size AAfor the MiniSonde ), remove them before any long-term storage. Do not remove the lithiumbattery which powers the multiprobe’s internal clock.

Use the Hydrolab’s carrying case (No. 013390) or a large plastic container to store yourequipment.

Lay the cable in coils of at least 6 inches (15 cm) in diameter at the bottom of the plasticcontainer.

Place the multiprobe in Hydrolab’s custom carrying case or in the center of the container on acircular piece of foam rubber for shock protection.((DELETED LISREF STORAGE SECTION, SEE “DS4 PSTRVR” & PLACE HERE))

DOs and DON’Ts for electrical cables

Your multiprobe cables are important components of your water quality monitoring system.They have been designed to be lightweight, portable, and durable. These cables serve twofunctions. First, raising, lowering, or deploying your multiprobe, and second, connecting yourinstrument with the surface computer or Surveyor 4 and providing power and data transfers.

Protect all nonwaterproof cables (i.e. all cables except the waterproof underwater cable) fromany water source during operation in the field. Keep all connectors dry at all times.

Properly lubricate the sealing surfaces of all underwater connectors, using silicone grease (pro-vided in the MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit). Do not use any other kind of grease.

Use protective plugs when your connectors (for the underwater and calibration cables) are notconnected to any instrument.


3-58


Keep all of your cables clean, dry, and stored - neatly coiled - in a large plastic container.

DO NOT knot the cables or use clips to mark a certain depth.

DO NOT place your instrument where the cable might be severed or damaged by boat propel-lers or other moving parts of your water monitoring system.

Protect all cables from abrasion, unnecessary tension, repetitive flexure, or bending over sharpradii (like the edge of the side of a boat or of a bridge). Do not bend or run the cable over thesheave or pulleys with less than a 6-inch diameter.

Use a battery-powered or hand-cranked reel with electrical slip-rings to lower and raise yourinstrument, if your cables are very long. You can also use a lighter reel without slip-rings forshorter cables. A last option, if you have sufficient deck space, is to mount the reel horizon-tally in the fashion of a “lazy Susan” (see “Definitions” in chapter 7) with the instrument and abattery installed in the hub.

Use the V-shaped support bail to lift and lower your multiprobe, if so equipped.

DO NOT apply more than 10 pounds (5 kilograms) of sinking weight to your multiprobe. Thiscan greatly increase the possibility of cable breakage due to stress on the mold and attachmentpoints. If you need more weight, use a wire line to support your instrument by its bail, if soequipped.


4-1CHAPTER 4:LOGGING AND DATA RETRIEVAL

1. The Hydrolab memory and logging system

The Hydrolab memory logging system comes in several options. Your multiprobe’s loggingcapacity will depend on the size of the memory installed. Memory is available in sizes zero (nomemory or logging software), 55,000 readings or 120,000 readings. Your multiprobe’s memorysize is shown on its label.

A logging multiprobe can be powered by several sources (refer to figure 4-1, on the following page):

• The DataSonde 4 has an optional internal battery pack (IBP) holding 8 size C alkalinebatteries (See the chapter 7 for “Expected battery life information”);

• The MiniSonde can be equipped with one of the two optional internal battery packs(IBP) holding 4 or 8 size AA alkaline batteries (See chapter 7 for “Expected battery lifeinformation”);

• Both multiprobes can use the external battery pack (RBP-6AH);

• Both multiprobes can use either of the following Hydrolab power supplies: the 110VAC 12VDC power adapter or the 220 VAC 12VDC power adapter;

• Both multiprobes can use a 12-volt vehicle battery connected via the battery adapter orthe cigarette lighter adapter and an external power adapter or a cable with a 4-pinfemale metal shell connector.


4-2

LOGGING AND DATA RETRIEVAL

External battery pack(110 VAC 12 VDC) (011050)(220 VAC 12 VDC) (012480)

Vehicle battery

Figure 4-1: Power options

For cables from “Figure 67: Assembly options”that you will find on the following pages.

HYDROLAB

Cigarette lighter adapter (013210)

Battery adapter (011530)

1212

121212

121212

121212

! WARNING: To avoid potential fatal electrical shock, never connect your multiprobe to a powersource which exceeds 15 volts.

! WARNING: To avoid potential fatal electrical shock, we suggest that you avoid using AC current(the first two power adapters below) to power your multiprobe. When deploying your multiprobeoutdoors, you should only use battery power. If you elect to deploy your multiprobe outdoors usingany power supply that is in any way connected to the AC mains (110 or 220 VAC), your AC powersupply cable MUST be protected by a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) device. The installation of theGFI device MUST be done by a licensed electrician. This device may save your life!

P

P



121212

121212

SC

EP

TR

EP

ower supplyU

L

(1)

(1) You need to connect your country’s corresponding power cord to this IEC 320 connector.(2) To prevent damage to your instrument, we recommend that you use a regulated 12 VDC adapter, an

unregulated 12 VDC adapter could exceed your instrument’s voltage limit rating.

(2)

(2)


4-3


2. The Files menu in the menu tree hierarchy

STEP 1: The menus pertaining to multiprobe data files and data retrieval can be accessedfrom the Main Menu.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a MiniSonde / DataSonde 4 04/12/96




23:11:15 24.59 48.3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Move your cursor to the Files submenu and press ENTER. The next screen willappear:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a MiniSonde / DataSonde 4 04/12/96

Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:27_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files

Create Transfer Status Delete Setup Autolog

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

! HINT : To understand and be able to create files, transfer files, check filesstatus, delete files and use the AutoLog feature, refer to the FilesFilesFilesFilesFilesmenu tree on the next page and the subsequent sections.

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde® U

ser’s Manual R

evision E

4-4

LO

GG

ING A

ND D

ATA R

ET

RIE

VAL

Files tree

Create

Files

Transfer

Status

Delete

AutoLog

The items present in the Files submenu above maydiffer from the ones on your screen, depending onthe system configuration that you have selected.

Setup


4-5


3. File handling and communications

Introduction

If you have already established communications with your multiprobe, turn the page and con-tinue with the “Notice” on the next page. If this is not the case, first boot your communicationsprogram (such as ProComm Plus for DOS, any other communications program). Set the termi-nal to ANSI terminal emulation, 19200 baud, eight bits, no parity, and one stop bit (19200, N,8, 1). Then, connect your multiprobe to your computer with either the calibration cable, de-tachable cable, fixed cable, or external power adapter, using an appropriate power source.Refer to figure 3-2 on the next page for detailed information.

If you are using a 100 meter or longer cable, you need to set your terminal baud rate to 9600 toaccommodate data transmission over such lengths.

When the multiprobe begins communicating with your computer, your screen should look likethis (your multiprobe configuration will determine the items displayed):

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a MiniSonde / DataSonde 4 04/12/96




23:11:15 24.59 48.323:11:16 24.59 48.323:11:17 24.59 48.323:11:18 24.59 48.323:11:19 24.59 48.323:11:23 24.59 48.323:11:24 24.59 48.323:11:25 24.59 48.323:11:26 24.59 48.3

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Int Batt 12.3 Circltr Off Logging Off AutoLog:Off Security 2 SDI:N/A

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4-6



___________________________________________________________________________________Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select...



23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0 565 4______________

IBM®, Apple®,or other PC

Da

taS

on

de®

4

Min

iSo

nd

e®

Surveyor® 4

There are many ways to connect a multiprobe to adisplay or a personal computer. Here are severalof the most common configurations.

Figure 3-2: Assembly options

Calibrationcable(013470)†

Externalpoweradapter*(013170)

11


Externalpoweradapter(013170)

Fixed cable(Several partnumbers)††

SDI-12 orRS-485RS-422adapter**(013510)



See figure 66 at the begin-ning of this chapter for“Power options”

* This is an external power option foruse with earlier multiprobes (via Sur-veyor 4 adapter), the calibration cable,the detachable cable, or the fixedcable.

** This cable usually connects to a datalogger, data collection platform, orother third-party device.

† These numbers stand for Hydrolabpart numbers. They were placed herefor your convenience.

†† These cables are available in severallengths. To choose the appropriatelength, call Hydrolab at 800-949-3766(in the U.S.A. and Canada only) or(512) 255-8841.

I.

11

11

11

11

11

11

1212

1212

1212

11

121212

111

111

! Requiresinstallationof IBP inmultiprobe,unless you usea Surveyor 412

1212

121212

121212

1212

121212

II. III.

P

P P PP

IV.


4-7


! NOTICE: Although the default security level is “2”, you might need tochange the security access level. The previous operator mighthave set the multiprobe to another security level. To changesecurity levels, move the cursor to LoginLoginLoginLoginLogin and press ENTER.Then, move the cursor to Level-2Level-2Level-2Level-2Level-2 and press ENTER. Level-2Level-2Level-2Level-2Level-2does not normally require a password. If you are prompted fora password, check with your organization.

After you have accessed security level 2, move the cursor to Files and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The next menu will appear:


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:27_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following six sections will detail these six menu choices.


4-8


Creating a file

As described in the previous section, your first choice is Create. You can create up to four filesdepending on the setup options chosen. Please see “File Setup” in this chapter for details. Care-fully follow the steps and explanations, they will guide you through the Files submenu structure.

Leave the cursor on Create and press ENTER. The following screen will be displayed:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Create:

Enter Log File Name: <<____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Log file Name:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 1: Enter the file name of your choice. For this example, we have chosen Hydrolab 1.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Create:

Enter Log File Name: Hydrolab 1<<____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Log file Name:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NOTES: If the file name you entered already exists in your multiprobe directory, the new file

will not replace the existing file. You will end up with two files with the same namebut different data, so you can still tell them apart.

If your directory is full, the message Directory is FULL! Press any key... will appear.You will need to check your files in the current directory and maybe delete some ofthem to be able to create a new file. Your screen will look as follows:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Create:

Directory is FULL! Press any key...

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Please see “Deleting a file” close to the end of this chapter for details.


4-9


STEP 2: The next prompt asks you to enter the starting date of the file you are about to create.For this example, we have chosen to press ENTER and accept the default starting date: 041296(for the example below). You can also enter the starting date of your choice.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Create:Enter Starting Date: <<____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Log file Name: Hydrolab 1Starting Date (MMDDYY): 041296

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Repeat the same instructions to set the Starting Time. Then enter the Stopping Date, StoppingTime, Interval (of the logging run),Sensor warmup, and Circltr warmup. The Sensor warmup optionlets you specify the amount of time that the multiprobe will allow the sensors to stabilize beforerecording the data. This stabilization time is important, particularly if your multiprobe is goingto be alternatively turned on and off in an unattended mode and if you want to record accuratereadings. Warm-up time will vary according to the sensors you are using on your multiprobe andon your field conditions (e.g. temperature). The Circltr warmup option lets you turn the circulatoron independently of the sensors (the time you enter must be greater than or equal to 5 secondsand less than or equal to the Sensor warmup) or off (enter 000000).

NOTE: The minimum logging interval is 000030 (30 seconds) if the multiprobe is setup to log

a maximum of 4 files (not including the AutoLog file). The minimum logging intervalcan be lowered at the expense of the maximum number of files that can be logged. Seethe section titled File Setup at the end of this chapter. The maximum logging interval is235959 (24 hours). If you enter 000060 for the interval, you will get an error message.You need to enter 000100 if you wish to have a one minute interval.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Create:Circltr warmup (HHMMSS): <<____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Log file Name: Hydrolab 1Starting Date (MMDDYY): 041296Starting Time (HHMMSS): 232000Stopping Date (MMDDYY): 011333Stopping time (HHMMSS): 122459Interval (HHMMSS): 001000Sensor warmup (HHMMSS): 00200Circltr warmup (HHMMSS): 00200Enable audio? (Y/N): N

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4-10


STEP 3: After Circltr warmup, the next prompt will ask you to choose the status of yourinstrument’s audio feature. This feature, characterized by a sharp beep, means that your sen-sors are on and that your multiprobe is acquiring data. The default setting always appears onthe display until you decide to change it. The default Y will appear on your screen, press EN-TER to accept it. You can also type N if you want to disable the audio during your logging eventand press ENTER.

NOTES: In our previous example, the Stopping date is 011133. This date stands for January 11th, 2033. Should you decide to turn your circulator off from the Setup:System:Circulator menu

but choose Y when prompted to enable the circulator for your logging file, you willnotice that the status of your circulator, on the status line, will change from Off to Onduring the time of your logging run.

STEP 4: After the last entry choice has been selected, the following prompt will appear:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Create:

File Created! Press any key...____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Log file Name: Hydrolab 1Starting Date (MMDDYY): 041296Starting Time (HHMMSS): 232000Stopping Date (MMDDYY): 011333Stopping time (HHMMSS): 122459Interval (HHMMSS): 001000Sensor warmup (HHMMSS): 00200Circltr warmup (HHMMSS): 00200Enable audio? (Y/N): N

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Press any key to return to the Main Menu.

NOTE: The logging positions for your multiprobe are Armed, Off, or N/A. Armed is displayed either

when a logging run has been entered or when logging is running. N/A will be displayedafter Logging on the status line, if your multiprobe is not equipped with the logging feature.


4-11


Transferring a file

File transfer is the next option on the Files menu line.

NOTE: For file transfer between your Surveyor 4 and your PC, see your Surveyor 4 user’s

manual for instructions.

STEP 1: In the Main Menu screen, move the cursor to Files and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The next menu will appear:


Serial No. 00000000 (C)1996, Hydrolab 23:11:27_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Move the cursor to Transfer and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4-12


The following submenu will appear on your screen:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Transfer:

Power down probes during dump? (Y/N): <<____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Time Temp DOHH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat

23:11:28 24.59 48.323:11:29 24.59 48.323:11:30 24.59 48.3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You have the choice between turning off your multiprobe or keeping it running in the back-ground, while transferring your data. If you are using batteries and choose to turn your multi-probe off during data transfer, your internal or external battery consumption will be reduced.This will also increase the life of your D.O. sensor if you are doing a long file transfer. How-ever, turning your multiprobe power down during data transfer means that the probes will haveto power back up after the transfer and a sensor warm-up time will be necessary before yourmultiprobe is fully operational. Make your choice and press ENTER.

File selection

STEP 1: The first step in data transfer is file selection. Enter the file number you wish totransfer (1 through 4, 0 is reserved for the AutoLog file) - let’s select 1 for this example - andpress ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Transfer:

Select Log File: 1<<____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval

MMDDYY HHMMSS MMDDYY HHMMSS HHMMSS

1 Hydrolab 1 041296 232000 011333 122459 0010002 Hydrolab 2 061796 122500 011169 234500 0100003 Hydrolab 3 061796 140500 010884 120000 0040004 Hydrolab 4 070296 120000 121478 100000 005000

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4-13


STEP 2: Your next choice is the type of transfer output that you would like. To select theappropriate transfer output, move the cursor to Printer-Ready or Spreadsheet-Importable: andpress ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Transfer:

Printer-Ready Spreadsheet-Importable

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

“Printer-Ready” file transfer

STEP 1: After you have chosen to send your file in a printer-ready format, you are promptedto choose the type of statistics (or information about your logging run) which will be sent to theprinter you have designated.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Transfer: Printer-Ready:

Statistics:None Daily Total Daily&Total

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: You can select Statistics:None and press ENTER.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4-14


If you selected Statistics:None, information similar to the following will be sent to the printerand/or to the capture file.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Log File Name: Hydrolab 1

Setup Date (MMDDYY): 041296Setup Time (HHMMSS): 232000Starting Date (MMDDYY): 041296Starting Time (HHMMSS): 232000Stopping Date (MMDDYY): 011333Stopping Time (HHMMSS): 122459Sensor warmup (HHMMSS): 00200Circltr warmup (HHMMSS): 00200

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Time Temp DOHH:MM:SS ˚C %SatDate (MMDDYY) : 041296Late probe turn on at 041296 23200223:21:15 24.59 48.323:22:16 24.59 48.323:23:17 24.59 48.3Recovery finished at 041296 235000

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: You can alternatively move the cursor to Daily and press ENTER.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If you selected Daily, information similar to the following about your file’s statistics for eachday will be sent to the printer and/or to the capture file following each day’s data. You willreceive information regarding the number of readings, the minimum value with the data and thetime it was recorded, the maximum value with the data and the time it was recorded, the maxi-mum change between two points with the data and the time it was recorded, and the mean stan-dard deviation for that day’s data. The printout will look as follows:


4-15


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Log File Name: Hydrolab 1

Setup Date (MMDDYY): 041296

Setup Time (HHMMSS): 232000

Starting Date (MMDDYY): 041296

Starting Time (HHMMSS): 232000

Stopping Date (MMDDYY): 011333

Stopping Time (HHMMSS): 122459

Sensor warmup (HHMMSS): 00200Circltr warmup (HHMMSS): 00200

Time Temp DO

HH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat

Date (MMDDYY) : 041296

Late probe turn on at 041296 232002

23:21:15 24.59 48.3

23:22:16 24.59 48.3

23:23:17 24.59 48.3Recovery finished at 041296 235000

Daily Time Temp DOStats HH:MM:SS ˚C %SatOut rng 0 0 0

Num rdg 5 5 5

Minimum 0.00 24.59 48.3MMDDYY 041296 041296 041296HHMMSS 232115 232116 232116

Maximum 0.00 24.59 48.3MMDDYY 041296 041296 041296HHMMSS 232115 232116 232116

Max chg 0.00 0.00 0.0MMDDYY 041296 041296 041296HHMMSS 232115 232116 232116

Mean 0.00 0.00 0.0

Std Dev 0.00 0.00 0.0__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4-16


STEP 4: You can also choose Total and press ENTER.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Total statistics are similar to Daily statistics. The difference is that Total statistics give you theoverall statistics over the entire logging run and not just on a daily basis.

STEP 5: Finally, you can move the cursor to Daily&Total and press ENTER.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If you selected Daily&Total statistics, daily and overall statistics will be calculated.

Just before the data transfer or ‘dump’ takes place, the next message will appear on your screen:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Activate printer and/or open capture file, then Press any key...

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

For ProComm Plus for DOS press Alt+F1 and follow the software prompts. Otherwise refer toyour software manual for capture file instructions.

Just after the data transfer has taken place, the next message will be displayed on your screen,and you will be returned to the Main Menu screen:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Deactivate printer and/or close capture file, then Press any key...

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4-17


“Spreadsheet-Importable” file transfer

To get to the Spreadsheet-Importable file transfer submenu, from the Main Menu, select theFiles submenu and press ENTER. Then, select Transfer and press ENTER. You will then beasked to choose between Printer-Ready or Spreadsheet-Importable file transfer. Since wehave already covered Printer-Ready in the previous section, let’s move the cursor to Spread-sheet-Importable and press ENTER.

STEP 1: After you have chosen to send your file in a Spreadsheet-Importable format from theTransfer submenu, you are prompted to select the file transfer protocol.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Transfer: Spreadsheet-Importable:

XMODEM XMODEM-1K

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The difference between XMODEM and XMODEM-1K is the block size of the data trans-ferred, XMODEM-1K allows you to send larger blocks of data, resulting in faster data trans-missions. Make your selection and press ENTER.

NOTE: If in the Setup:Display:Radix submenu you chose to have Decimal-Point as the radix,

your files will automatically have comma separated values when you import them to aspreadsheet. If you chose Comma as the radix, your files will automatically have tabseparated values when you import them to a spreadsheet.

STEP 2: In this example, we selected XMODEM. The following screen appears:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Transfer: Spreadsheet-Importable: XMODEM:

Starting XMODEM transfer...____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


4-18


STEP 3: If you are using ProComm Plus for DOS communications software, press thePgDn key and select the X option to select the XMODEM protocol and to start the down-loading process (or select O for XMODEM-1K). Then, enter the file name when prompted.Press Ctrl+X to abort the file transfer. See chapter 7 for ProComm Plus for DOS instruc-tions. Otherwise, follow your software prompts.

STEP 4: When the file transfer is complete, the following screen will appear:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Transfer: Spreadsheet-Importable:

Transfer completed! Press any key...____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Press any key to return to the Main Menu screen.


4-19


Checking the status of a file

To obtain information about your files, your instrument’s memory, or any other component ofyour system (the IBP in this example), you can access the Files submenu. Then, move thecursor to Status and press ENTER. The following screen will be appear:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Status:

Estimates only, see manual for details. Press any key...____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval



Status at 041296 232500Memory: 125750 bytes left (2831 scans or 28314 rdgs w/current parameters)IBP: 100% left


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Here is why the message reads: Estimates only, see manual for details...

The first Status at... line represents your instrument’s date time at the moment of status inquiry.The first Memory:... line represents your instrument’s memory left (in bytes) at the moment ofstatus inquiry.The first IBP:... line represents the multiprobe’s internal battery pack (IBP) voltage status (inpercentage) at the moment of status inquiry.The next three lines represent your instrument’s status at the end of the logged file (date andtime, memory, and IBP percentage) after the last logging has been completed.The completion of a logging run is the only time when both status line groups are identical.

If your memory is full and/or your internal battery pack is exhausted, the following display willappear:


4-20


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Status at 121496 100000

Memory: used up at 121496 100000IBP: used up at 121496 100000

Status at 121496 100000Memory: used up at 121496 100000IBP: used up at 121496 100000

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The memory and IBP status lines let you estimate how much memory space and battery poweryou need to allocate for your logging run.

If you request a file status and no files are stored in the memory, your instrument will displaythe following message:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________No Log Files available!


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Deleting a file

This section will show you how you can delete a file from your directory.

STEP 1: In the Main Menu, move the cursor to Files and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: In the Files submenu, move the cursor to Delete and press ENTER.


4-21


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Then, the following screen will appear:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Delete:

Select Log File: <<____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Your file choices are 1 through 4 (0 is the AutoLog file number). Type the appropri-ate number and press ENTER. Your instrument prompts you to confirm that you really wantto delete the selected file. We used Hydrolab 1 in the example below. You will also hear twobells to alert you. The warning prompt will read as follows:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Delete:

Are you sure you want to delete “Hydrolab 1”? (Y/N): <<____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval



WARNING: Data will be lost !

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: If you choose not to delete the file Hydrolab 1 (by pressing N and then ENTER), thenext message will appear on your computer screen:


4-22


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Delete:

“Hydrolab 1” has NOT been DELETED! Press any key...____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval

MMDDYY HHMMSS MMDDYY HHMMSS HHMMSS1 Hydrolab 1 041296 232000 011333 122459 0010002 Hydrolab 2 061796 122500 011169 234500 0100003 Hydrolab 3 061796 140500 010884 120000 0040004 Hydrolab 4 070296 120000 121478 100000 005000


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: If you have chosen Y, pressed ENTER, and deleted the file Hydrolab 1, the nextmessage will appear on your screen:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Delete:

“Hydrolab 1” has been DELETED! Press any key...____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The AutoLog feature

The AutoLog feature is the last Files submenu choice. The AutoLog feature, once turned on,works as a back up logging file, in case something happens to your log files. The AutoLog featurecaptures - once every hour with a two-minute warm-up - a reading of all available parameters, yourbattery voltages, and it also turns on the audio and the circulator with a two-minute warm-up (ifinstalled).

STEP 1: To turn on or “arm” the AutoLog, from the Main Menu, move your cursor to Filesand press ENTER. Then, move the cursor to AutoLog and press ENTER.

STEP 2: The next screen appears:


4-23


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: AutoLog:

On Off

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Press ENTER to arm the AutoLog feature, otherwise press Esc to abort. If you have pressedENTER, look at the bottom of your screen, under AutoLog, you can now see the mention Armed,which means that your instrument is now in AutoLog mode until you disable it.

If you go to Files and the Status, you will see the following screen showing you the AutoLogfile (file “ 0”) with a 010000 (a one-hour interval), and the last line estimating when your multi-probe memory and internal battery pack (if installed) will run out.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Status:

Estimates only, see manual for details. Press any key...____________________________________________________________________________________________________________### Log file Name Start Stop Interval


0 => AutoLog <= 010170 000000 123169 235959 0100001 Hydrolab 2 061796 122500 011169 234500 0100002 Hydrolab 3 061796 140500 010884 120000 0040003 Hydrolab 4 070296 120000 121478 100000 005000


Status at 041296 234000Memory : used up at 061797 174559IBP : used up at 041397 174113IBP: 100% left

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If you turn this feature off, the => AutoLog <= line in the Status submenu will have a Disabledin the Interval column. And both Status at ... reports will be identical, unless you have alogging file running in the background.

Should you decide to resume the AutoLog feature, the AutoLog file you initially created isreopened or “armed” again, and all new data will be added to the same => AutoLog <= file.


4-24


File Setup

The last sub-menu choice allows to customize the file handling capability of your multiprobe.If you need to record data at an interval faster than 30 seconds, you will have to reduce themaximum number of files that can be handled by the multiprobe. This feature is accessed inthe Files:Setup menu. You must be in security level 3 and the files directory must be com-pletely empty of all files except the AutoLog file before you can make this change.

STEP 1: To change the files setup, move your cursor to Files and press ENTER. Then movethe cursor to Setup and press ENTER.

STEP 2: The next screen appears:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Id: n/a DataSonde 4 / MiniSonde 03/13/98Serial No. 000000 (C)1997, Hydrolab 14:02:51____________________________________________________________________________________________________________Files: Setup: 1-File(5-sec) 2-Files(10-sec) 3-Files(20-sec) 4-Files(30-sec)

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The first choice allows you to create a log file with an interval a small as five seconds. How-ever, you are limited to one log file not including the AutoLog file. You can select 2 files witha minimum interval of 10 seconds, 3 files with a minimum interval of 20 seconds, or 4 fileswith a minimum interval of 30 seconds. If the directory is not empty, you will see a Directoryis not empty! message.

You have now successfully mastered file handling with your new Hydrolab multiprobe.


5-1CHAPTER 5: DEPLOYMENTAND FIELD APPLICATIONS

1. Deployment in open waters

Introduction

! DANGER: Operate your multiprobe only with batteries (with a combinedvoltage not to exceed 15 volts) or with a Hydrolab power supply(as shown on figure 1-2 in chapter 1). Connection to any otherpower supply can result in potentially fatal electrical shock and/or instrumentation damage. If you use a battery, make surethat your battery’s voltage is between 5 and 15 volts. PLEASEREAD THE WARNINGS ON FIGURE 1-2 IN CHAPTER 1.

! WARNING: To avoid irreparable damage to your instrument, insert anoptional sensor expansion port plug in any vacant sensor ex-pansion port (see figures 5-1 and 5-2, on the next page).

To correctly power and assemble your multiprobe, we recommend that you refer to chapter 1and associated figures 1-1 and 1-2.

Long-term deployment in open waters

The multiprobe can be anchored by running a rope or chain through the bail, if your multi-probe is equipped with a support bail (see figure 5-3, on the next page). The bail is fixed intothe two eyebolts on the top of the multiprobe by turning one eyebolt 90° (and then back) sothat the bail can be looped through it (see figures 5-5 to 5-8, on the following pages). Securelytighten the lock nut on each eyebolt. If your multiprobe is not equipped with internal batter-ies, it may not have a bail but can be secured by using the locking sleeve (see figure 5-4, on thefollowing pages).

If you have a MiniSonde equipped with an internal battery pack, you need to use the MiniSondemooring fixture which screws onto the multiprobe’s bulkhead connector and provides an eyeletfor rope or wire mooring when no cable is used during deployment (see fig. 5-3 on next page).

If you are using the multiprobe in open water, try to locate the multiprobe strategically where itwill not get damaged or stolen. For instance, to protect your multiprobe from being hit by float-ing debris in a moderate- to high-flow level river, anchor the multiprobe to the downstream sideof a bridge piling (see figures 5-10, on the following pages). To protect your multiprobe, you canalso use the Hydrolab DS4 or MS pipe kit (see figures 5-9 and 5-10, on the following pages).

Likewise, in a recreational lake deployment, use a marking buoy that will not attract the atten-tion of vandals (see figure 5-12 , on the following pages).


5-2

DEPLOYMENT AND FIELD APPLICATIONS

123123123123123123123123123123123123123123

1234123412341234123412341234

FIGURE 5-3: MOORING FIXTURE AND SUPPORT BAIL ANCHORING

12345123451234512345123451234512345

1234123412341234123412341234

12345123451234512345123451234512345

sensorexpansionportplugs

sensorexpansionport plug(side view)

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

11111111

1212121212121212

1212121212121212

11111111

sensorsdepth sensor’s seal screw

circulatorsensor

FIGURE 5-1: SENSORS AND ACCESSORIES CONFIGURATION

FIGURE 5-2:EXPANSION PORT PLUGsensor end

of the multiprobe

Quick-Link™

bail

eyebolt

mooringfixture

MiniSondewith internalbattery pack

rope or cable

123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123


5-3


HYDROLAB CORP MADE IN USA

SERIAL NO. 31252


SERIAL NO. 31252

FIGURE 5-5: SUPPORT BAIL INSTALLATION (1) FIGURE 5-6: SUPPORT BAIL INSTALLATION (2)

6-Pin Malemarine bulkheadconnector

multiprobe

locking sleeve with 6-PinFemale marine connector

FIGURE 5-4: LOCKING SLEEVE INSTALLATION

bail

eyebolt


5-4



SERIAL NO. 31252


SERIAL NO. 31252

1.

2.

3.

4.

FIGURE 5-7: SUPPORT BAIL INSTALLATION (3)

FIGURE 5-8: SUPPORT BAIL INSTALLATION (4)


5-5


12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901231234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123123456789012345678901234567890121234567890123456789012312345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901231234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123123456789012345678901234567890121234567890123456789012312345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901231234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123

FIGURES 5-9 & 5-10: BRIDGE DEPLOYMENT AND PIPE KIT

123123123123123123

123123123123123123123

123456789123456789

123456789123456789

123456123456

FIGURE 5-11: STRUCTURE DEPLOYMENT FIGURE 5-12: LAKE DEPLOYMENT

123456789012345678901123456789012345678901

123456789012345678901123456789012345678901

123456123456123456123456123456123456123456123456123456123456

locking cap

protec t ivePVC pipe

slotted cap

multiprobe


5-6


Try to fix the multiprobe in an upright or on-side position, and avoid areas that might see deepdeposits of sand, gravel, or silt during heavy rainfalls. We recommend use of duct or electricaltape over the sealing areas around the sensor end of the multiprobe to avoid deposits, silt, andgrit. To prevent multiprobe damage and/or loss, avoid deploying your instrument in waterswhere icing might trap the multiprobe.

When securing the multiprobe to a structure, carefully place the straps on both extremities ofthe multiprobe housing as shown on figure 5-11, on the previous page. We recommend usingweb belts and bungee cords. To avoid damage and leaks, do not use clamps.

Take similar precautions with the cable to protect it from floating debris, navigation, and van-dals (see figure 5-11, on the previous page).

Always make sure the screw-on weighted sensor guard is installed (see figure 5-13, on the nextpage) to protect the sensors and provide additional sinking weight to the multiprobe.

Some sensors may not stay calibrated for long periods in certain situations. For instance, aD.O. cell may become extremely fouled after just a few days in a warm, shallow, biologicallyactive lake. Likewise, a reference electrode’s performance will begin to deteriorate quickly ina flowing stream of low ionic-strength water. On the other hand, if the only parameters beingmeasured are temperature and conductivity, the multiprobe can be left for weeks in a clean-water lake.

The decisions regarding deployment time are best based on experience; however, deploymenttime can be judged by making periodic - say, daily - measurements of sensitive parameterswith another instrument. The day on which the spot-measurements and the logged data beginto diverge significantly may be considered the maximum deployment time for that particularwater and season.

Short-term deployment in open waters

Generally, short-term deployment implies hand-held operation. Just follow common sense;for instance, don’t lower the multiprobe into the water without screwing on the weighted sen-sor guard. Do not place your instrument where the cable might be severed or damaged by boatpropellers or any moving parts of your monitoring system. Protect the PC from damp-ness and mechanical shock. Protect all cables from abrasion, unnecessary tension, repetitiveflexure, or bending over sharp radii (like a boat gunwale or a bridge railing). Do not bend or runthe cable over the sheave or pulleys with less than a 3-inch radius or 6 inches in diameter (seefigure 5-14, on the next page).

Use the V-shaped support bail to lift and lower your multiprobe, if so is equipped. Thisway, the weight of the multiprobe is suspended from the bail and no weight is on the cable’sconnectors. If your multiprobe is equipped with a locking sleeve instead of a support bail (seefigure 5-4, on the previous pages), you should make sure that the locking sleeve or the MiniSondemooring fixture are properly screwed on your multiprobe 6-pin male marine bulkhead connec-


5-7


123412341234123412341234

1234123412341234123412341234

1234123412341234123412341234

123412341234123412341234123412341234123412341234123412341234123412341234123412341234123412341234

1.

2.

FIGURE 5-13: WEIGHTED SENSOR GUARD INSTALLATION

1 6 inches

1 6 inches

FIGURE 5-14: CABLES DOS AND DON’TS

12121212

123456123456

12121212

FIGURE 5-15: BOAT DEPLOYMENT


5-8


tor before deployment.

You can weight the multiprobe (for faster sinking) by attaching weights up to 5 kilograms (or10 pounds) maximum. If you need more weight, use a wire line to support your instrument byits bail, if so equipped.

Use a battery-powered or hand-cranked reel with electrical slip-rings to lower and raise yourinstrument, if your cables are very long. You can also use a lighter reel without slip-rings forshorter cables (see figure 5-15, on the previous page). A last option, if you have sufficientdeck-space, is to mount the reel horizontally in the fashion of a “lazy Susan” with the instru-ment and a battery installed in the hub (see figure 5-15, on the previous page). You can also useHydrolab’s cable reel which stores up to 150 meters (or 490 feet) of underwater cable (the reelmust be ordered with your initial underwater cable purchase).

2. Using the circulator

When deploying your multiprobe in waters flowing at less than one foot per second (or 25cm/s), we recommend that you use the circulator to provide adequate flow for reliableD.O. readings. The circulator is activated via the multiprobe menus:

STEP 1: First, let’s start with the Main Menu and move the cursor to Setup, and press ENTER.




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Now, leave the cursor on System, and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


5-9


STEP 3: Finally, move the cursor to Circulator and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: This is the final screen you will see for this path. Leave the cursor on On and pressENTER to accept the selection.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: System: Circulator:

On Off

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Your circulator is now on, until you turn it off via the multiprobe software. After the last screenappears, you will automatically be returned to the Main Menu.

Turning the circulator on or off will help you during profiling and logging D.O., depending onthe flow rate of the water at your site. If you are profiling and notice insufficient flow rate atyour site, turn the circulator on via the software route. If you do not need data for an extendedperiod of time and would like to extend your battery’s life, turn the circulator off. If you arelogging data in a unattended mode, and need to have sufficient flow for accurate measure-ments, turn the circulator on, but note that this will reduce your multiprobe battery life. Forinformation about expected battery life, refer to chapter 7.

When the multiprobe is powered back on, it takes some time to “warm-up”. The warm-up timerefers to your sensors’ time to be ready to record accurate data. Warm-up time will vary ac-cording to the sensors you are using and your field conditions (e.g. temperature).

NOTE: If the circulator is turned off and you decide to turn it on when creating a file, it will

come on periodically while the multiprobe is recording data.


5-10


3. Using the flow cell

FIGURE 5-16: FLOW CELL

For process or pump-through situations, attach the Hydrolab low-pressure flow cell to yourmultiprobe. This configuration allows you to study the water without submerging the multi-probe in the water being studied. The flow cell simply screws on in place of the DS4 storagecup or MS cup (see figure 5-16, above). If you are measuring dissolved oxygen, and if youhave a circulator, we recomend that you use it in conjunction with the flow cell. If you do nothave a circulator, you should use a flow rate of more than 4 liters per minute. You need to usea 1/2 inch hoses for the MS flow cell and a 3/4 inch hoses for the DS4 flow cell.

! WARNING: Do not let the pressure in the flow cell or its feed line exceed 15 poundper square inch gage (psig). Higher pressures can burst the flow cell,possibly causing serious bodily injury to you and/or bystanders.

Filter debris from the feed line if necessary. If possible, invert the multiprobe, so that bubbleswill tend to float away from the sensors and out the port on the bottom of the flow cell.

123456789011234567890112345678901123456789011234567890112345678901

123456123456

12341234

123451234512345

12345123451234512345

12345671234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567123456712345671234567

nipple

nipplepipe or hose (connected)(1/2” for MS;3/4” for DS4)

multiprobe

pipe or hose(1/2” for MS;3/4” for DS4)

123412341234123412341234

IN

OUT


5-11


sensorexpansionportplugs

sensorsdepth sensor’s seal screw

depth sensor’sseal screw(side view)

12345678123456781234567812345678

circulatorsensor

FIGURE 5-19: SENSORS AND ACCESSORIES CONFIGURATION

FIGURE 5-18: SEAL SCREW


12121212

225 meters

200

100

0 meters

MAXIMUM

FIGURE 5-17: DEPTH EX-TREMES

4. Pressure and temperature extremesYour multiprobe can be equipped with one of the following depth options: 0 to 10 meters (or 33feet), called vented depth, 0 to 25, 0 to 100, and 0 to 200 meters (82, 328, and 656 feet). Please,read the next two warnings carefully before deploying your instrument.

! WARNING : The 0-10 meter vented depth sensor should be protected fromdepths over 15 meters (49 feet) by installing the seal screw (pro-vided in the DS4 basic maintenance kit) in the face of the mul-tip robe sensor cap (see figures 5-18 and 5-19 below). Likewise,the 0-25 meter depth sensor should be protected from depthsover 50 meters (164 feet) by installing the same seal screw. How-ever, the 100- and 200-meter depth sensors do not require in-stallation of the seal screw.

! WARNING : The multiprobe maximum immersion depth is 225 meters (738feet). Please, refer to figure 5-17 below.


5-12


123456712345671234567

1 ˚C MINIMUM

50 ˚C MAXIMUM

123456789012312345678901231234567890123123456789012312345678901231234567890123123456789012312345678901231234567890123123456789012312345678901231234567890123123456789012312345678901231234567890123123456789012312345678901231234567890123123456789012312345678901231234567890123

123456789012345678901234512345678901234567890123451234567890123456789012345123456789012345678901234512345678901234567890123451234567890123456789012345123456789012345678901234512345678901234567890123451234567890123456789012345

12345671234567

FIGURE 5-20: STORAGE AND OPERATING TEMPERATURE EXTREMES

-5 ˚C MINIMUM

50 ˚C MAXIMUM

OPERATING: STORAGE:

The multiprobe’s storage temperature range is 1 ˚C (or 34 ˚F) to 50 ˚C (or 122 ˚F) when goingto or coming back from your deployment site, or when storing your multiprobe (see figure 5-20below). The multiprobe’s operating temperature range is -5 ˚C (or 23 ˚F) to 50 ˚C (or 122 ˚F).Exposure of the multiprobe to temperatures outside of this range might result in mechanicaldamage or faulty electronic performance.

To prevent the sensors from freezing, fill the DS4 storage cup or MS cup with half an inch oftap water and half an inch of alcohol. Rinse with deionized water before calibration or deploy-ment. In warmer weather, to prevent the sensors from dehydrating, fill the DS4 storage cup orMS cup with one inch of clean tap water.

Always rinse the multiprobe with clean tap water after deployments.


5-13


FIGURE 5-21: CABLE EXTENSION

12121212

sealed junction boxHydrolabdetachablecable(e.g.: 25 m)

your cable(e.g.: 290 m)

5. Data transmission linesIf you are adding a transmission cable to your multiprobe, the added cable must be large enoughto carry the operating current and transfer data without distortion. For up to a total of 305meters (or 1 000 feet) of cable, three #26 AWG wires are suitable for data transmission, but two#18 AWG must be used for the power wires. Alternatively, smaller power wires can be used ifthe power supply is located closer to the multiprobe.

For instance, if a lake is 15 meters (or 50 feet) deep and the computer to which the multiprobeis connected is 290 meters (or 950 feet) away from the lake, we recommend that you buy a 25-meter Hydrolab cable for the multiprobe and supply the other 290 meters yourself with moreeconomical wire.

You can use a cable extension for above-ground applications only (See figure 5-21 below).

Attaching the battery at the shore of the lake (instead of near the computer) will further saveyou the cost of the large wires required for power transmission.

You will need to lower the multiprobe baud rate for reliable data transmission over long cablelengths.

Alternatively, if you need to transmit the data from your multiprobe over extremely long dis-tances, consider installing the RS-422/RS-485 interface in the multiprobe. This interface willaccommodate distances up to 4000 feet (1219 meters) using fast baud rates and low cost cable.See Appendix A8 for further details.

1231 2 3123123456789

1 2345678 91 2345678 91 2345678 91 2345678 91 2345678 91 2345678 9123456789

12345678123456781234567812345678

1234567123456712345671234567


5-14


6. Internal battery replacementYour multiprobe is equipped with the following internal batteries:

• 8 size C alkaline batteries (for the DataSonde 4).• 4 or 8 size AA alkaline batteries (for the MiniSonde).

• A lithium battery (for both multiprobes). For lithium battery replacement, refer tochapter 7, under “Multiprobe lithium battery replacement”.

What do I need to replace these batteries?

• Silicone grease (provided in the MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit)• 8 size C alkaline batteries for the DS4• 4 or 8 size AA alkaline batteries for the MS

! CAUTION: Water can get trapped between the multiprobe battery capcontact surface and the top of the multiprobe battery com-partment o-rings. To avoid water leaks into the multiprobebattery compartment during maintenance or replacement,place the multiprobe horizontally on the work surface whenremoving the battery cap.

! CAUTION: To avoid water contact with your multiprobe’s internal compo-nents during battery replacement, we recommend that you avoidreplacing the batteries close to a water source.

Steps to follow for the DataSonde 4

To replace the multiprobe’s internal batteries, follow these steps with the figures on thefollowing pages.

STEP 1: Set the multiprobe horizontally on the work surface. To loosen the thumbscrew, holdit between your thumb and index finger and turn the screw with a counterclockwise motion.

You have now covered most of the deployment DO’s and DON’Ts. Should you have anyfurther questions for a specific field application, please call Hydrolab technical support at 800-949-3766 (in the United States of America and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.


5-15


If you have difficulties removing the thumbscrew, pressure may have built up inside of themultiprobe housing. To avoid serious injuries, use extreme caution when loosening the batterycap thumbscrew.

STEP 2: Pull the cap out of its housing. Slide the old batteries out of their compartment.

STEP 3: Discard the old batteries. Insert the new batteries in the multiprobe battery compart-ments, observing polarity markings (see labels inside the multiprobe).

STEP 4: Coat the 4 battery cap o-rings sparingly with silicone grease.

STEP 5: Insert the cap back into its multiprobe housing. Tighten the thumbscrew using aclockwise motion, finger-tight only.

! CAUTION: If water leaks into the multiprobe battery compartment, re-move the batteries, pour the water out, and thoroughly dry thecompartment with a hair dryer (on low heat) or a towel. Then,install the new batteries.


5-16


Figures 5-22 & 5-23: DataSonde 4 battery cap

washer

screw

spring

thumbscrew

o-rings

DataSonde 4

DataSonde 4 battery cap

FIGURE 5-22: DATASONDE 4 BATTERY CAP (1)

FIGURE 5-23: DATASONDE 4 BATTERY CAP (2)

DURACELL ®

ALKALINE BATTERY

+ x 8 C


5-17


Steps to follow for the MiniSonde

To replace the multiprobe’s internal batteries, follow the next steps with the figures on thefollowing page.

! CAUTION: Water can get trapped between the multiprobe battery capcontact surface and the top of the multiprobe battery com-partment o-rings. To avoid water leaks into the multiprobebattery compartment during maintenance or replacement,place the multiprobe horizontally on the work surface whenremoving the battery cap.

! CAUTION: To avoid water contact with your multiprobe’s internal compo-nents during battery replacement, we recommend that you avoidreplacing the batteries close to a water source.

Your MiniSonde can have one of two types of internal battery arrangements; 4 or 8 AA sizealkaline cells. Each group of 4 cells is housed in a separate compartment. Be sure to change all4 or 8 cells at the same time with fresh batteries.

STEP 1: Set the MiniSonde horizontally on a flat work surface. Loosen and remove the twoAllen screws that hold the top cap to the first battery compartment.

If you have difficulty removing the screws, pressure may have built up inside the multiprobehousing. To avoid serious injury, use extreme caution when loosening the Allen screws.

STEP 2: Pull the top cap out of the first battery housing. Slide the old batteries out of thebattery housing and discard.

STEP 3: If your MiniSonde has the 8 cell option installed, loosen and remove the two Allenscrews that connect the first battery compartment to the second battery compartment.

STEP 4: If your MiniSonde has the 8 cell option installed, pull the first battery compartmentout of the second battery compartment. Slide the remaining 4 batteries out of the housing anddiscard.

STEP 5: Insert the 4 new batteries in the second battery compartment (if equipped) and fournew batteries into the first compartment. Be sure to observe the polarity markings on the labelsinside each of the compartments.


5-18


STEP 6: Coat all of the o-rings sparingly with silicone grease.

STEP 7: Insert the top battery housing into the second battery housing (if equipped). Themetal pins must line up with the corresponding holes. Do not attempt to twist the housing.Insert the top cap into the top of the first battery housing. Install the two or four Allen screws,but do not overtighten.

! CAUTION: If water leaks into the multiprobe battery compartment, re-move the batteries, pour the water out, and thoroughly dry thecompartment with a hair dryer (on low heat) or a towel. Then,install the new batteries.

FIGURE 5-24: MINISONDE ASSEMBLY WITH 8 CELLS)

penetrator(or bulkheadconnector)

MiniSonde

MiniSondebattery cap

(Side view)

Allenscrew

o-rings

Figures 5-24 & 5-27: MiniSonde battery cap

Allenscrew

MiniSondebattery pack


5-19


MiniSonde battery cap

FIGURE 5-25: MINISONDEASSEMBLY (WITH 4 CELLS)

FIGURE 5-27: MINISONDE BATTERY CAP (2)


o-rings

springs


MiniSonde

MiniSonde

MiniSondebattery cap

springs

(Top view)

(Side view)

Allenscrew

DURACELL ®

ALKALINE BATTERY

+ x 4 AA

FIGURE 5-26: MINISONDEBATTERY CAP (1)


6-1

1. CommunicationsIf you do not see the first screen appear on your computer, after booting up your communica-tions software and connecting your multiprobe to your computer, please check the followingitems:

1. Your PC and terminal emulation or communications software:

Boot up your communications software before connecting your instrument.

Verify that your PC is “on” and that the communications software is running.

Verify that you selected the correct communication port (COM1, 2, 3, 4).

Verify that you set your terminal to ANSI terminal emulation, and that you selected thecorrect baud rate (19200), eight bits, no parity, and one stop bit (19200, N, 8, 1).

If you are using a 100 meter or longer cable, you need to set your terminal baudrate to9600 to accommodate data transmission over such lengths.

NOTE: If your are using Procomm Plus for DOS emulation software, refer to your Procomm

Plus User’s Manual or the “Procomm Plus for DOS basic commands” in chapter 7. If your are using another communications program, such as HyperTerminal for Wid-

ows 95, please refer to the corresponding section at the end of chapter 7.

2. Your power cables and connections:

Verify that your PC and multiprobe are properly connected to the wall power outlet orexternal battery if used. Refer to figures 1 and 2 in chapter l, and carefully read allassociated warnings.

Verify that the input voltage to the multiprobe is between 5 and 15 volts.

If your multiprobe is equipped with an internal battery pack, verify that you properlyinstalled the battery pack. Check the batteries’ polarity and voltages.

3. Internal components:

To open the multiprobe, refer to chapter 7, under “Battery replacement”, and read allassociated warnings.

Make sure that all internal connections are securely seated.

CHAPTER 6:TROUBLESHOOTING


6-2

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check for the presence of water in the unit. If damp or wet, dry out thoroughly usinga hair dryer on low heat or a lint-free cloth or towel. Determine where the leak oc-curred and carry out repairs if possible.

! WARNING: W hen loosening removable parts from a multiprobe, always pointthose parts away from your body and other people. In extremeconditions, excess pressure may build up inside any underwaterhousing, causing the caps, sensors, or other removable parts todisengage with force sufficient to cause serious injury.

Please notify Hydrolab technical support by calling 800-949-3766 (in the United Statesof America and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841, so we can help you prevent furtherleaks in your unit.

If these checks do not reveal the problem, try to substitute other instruments, cablesand terminals to determine the failing component.

2. Sensor-specific issuesThe following list is not an extensive account of the problems you may encounter. We recom-mend that you refer to chapter 3 under “Quick calibration troubleshooting guidelines”, the“Appendices” chapter for optional sensor troubleshooting, and the “Quick Reference” chapterunder “Multiprobe error message directory”.

• D.O. readings are too low to calibrate and/or pH and/or Redox readings are very highor very low:

Are you sure of the value of your sample solution?Have the sensors been properly maintained?

• D.O. readings seem wrong:

Has the D.O. sensor been properly serviced and calibrated?

• Conductivity, Temperature and/or Depth readings seem wrong:

Have the sensors been properly serviced and calibrated?Are you sure of the readings being displayed (for Depth: meters, feet, or psi!)

If these checks do not reveal the problem, try to substitute other sensors to determine


6-3

TROUBLESHOOTING

the failing component.

3. Additional troubleshootingYou can find additional troubleshooting reference in the “Maintenance, calibration, and stor-age” chapter of this manual, under “Multiprobe software symbols table”. You can also referto the “Quick reference” chapter, under “Multiprobe error message directory”, for valuableinformation regarding error messages produced by your instrument and the actions that needto be taken. Additional troubleshooting information on additional sensors can be found in“Appendices.”

DataSonde® 4 / MiniSonde User’s Manual Revision B

7-1CHAPTER 7:QUICK REFERENCE

1. Introduction

This section of your manual will provide you with important information about detailedmultiprobe features and reference. Some of the sections and tables will seem familiar,since most of them are part of a certain chapter or section that you have probably alreadyread. The definitions include dictionary definitions as well as Hydrolab-specific termswhich will help you with the water monitoring terminology used in this manual.

We recommend that you detach this reference chapter and place it in a plastic sheetprotector. Bring this reference chapter with you when deploying your equipment, col-lecting or transferring data, or setting up a logging run.

2. Contents

Abbreviations 7-2

Definitions 7-3

Equipment characteristics 7-7

Expected battery life information and currents 7-9

Battery replacement 7-13

Multiprobe error message directory 7-17

ProComm Plus for DOS basic commands 7-18

HyperTerminal basic commands 7-20

Multiprobe menu and submenu tree structure - Main menu 7-23

HL tree 7-24

Login tree 7-25

Setup tree 7-26

Calibrate tree 7-29

Files tree 7-30

Software tree 7-31


7-2

QUICK REFERENCE

Ω

3. AbbreviationsAgCl Silver ChlorideAh Ampere hourAWG American wire gageBDR Basic data recorderBP Battery pack; barometric pressureCC Calibration cable˚C Degrees Celsius (centigrade) (The conversion to obtain the temperature in ˚C:

the temperature in (˚F - 32) (5/9); e.g. (77 ˚F - 32) (5/9) = 25 ˚F)CSV Comma-separated value (for data transmission)DS4 DataSonde® 4EPA External power adapter˚F Degrees Fahrenheit (The conversion to obtain the temperature in F: 32 + 9/5 of

the temperature in ˚C; e.g. 32 + (9/5 25 ˚C) = 77 ˚F)GFI Ground fault interrupt (device)IBP Internal battery packIC Interface cableK Degrees Kelvin, or kelvin. A unit of absolute temperatureKCl Potassium chloridel or L LitermmHg Millimeter of mercury (hectoPascal and millibar are also used in Europe)mil A unit of length, equal to 0.001 inch... M KCl ... molar potassium chlorideµm Micrometerm Millimho = milliSiemens (mS)µS/cm MicroSiemens per centimeter = micromho per cmm Meter (1 meter = 3.281 feet; all equivalents in this manual are given based on

this conversion and have been rounded off)MS MiniSonde®mS/cm MilliSiemens per centimetermV Millivoltnm NanometerPA Probe assemblyPCB Printed circuit boardppt Parts per thousandpsu Practical salinity unitpsia Pound per square inch absolutepsig Pound per square inch gageRBP Rechargeable battery pack (usu. RBP-6AH (i.e. 6 Ah)RGA Returned goods authorizationSDI Serial-digital interfaceSTDREF Standard reference electrodeCIRCLTR FreshFlow™ miniature sample circulator, also referred to as circulatorSVR4 Surveyor® 4WSG Weighted sensor guard4PF 4-pin female connector4PM 4-pin male connector6PF 6-pin female connector6PM 6-pin male connector9PF 9-pin female connector9PM 9-pin male connector


7-3

QUICK REFERENCE

4. Definitions

This short list will help the reader find a definition or an explanation of terms used in this manual.

All the boldface words are followed by their dictionary definition.

ITM stands for “In This Manual” and provides a definition or further explanations and informationwhich apply directly to specific uses of the terms in this multiprobe manual.

Ammonia Data collection platform

Ammonia:Ammonia is a colorless gaseous alkaline compoundwhich is very soluble in water. NH

3 is the symbol for

ammonia. It has a characteristic pungent odor, and isused as a fertilizer. In water and soil, ammonia is presentprimarily as NH

4+ ions and is readily assimilated by plants

during nutrition.Ammonium:Ammonium is a form of ammonia by the addition of ahydrogen ion (H+) to an ammonia molecule (NH

3). Am-

monia is converted to ammonium as the pH of a solu-tion drops. Ammonium is less harmful to aquatic lifethan ammonia. Below a pH of 7.3, more than 99% ofthe total ammonia is present as ammonium. Its symbolis NH

4+.

Assembly:A unit containing the component parts of a mechanism,machine, or similar device. (ITM) Probe Assembly: Theunit containing the component parts of a sensor (e.g. D.O.:component consisting of the D.O. sensor which is madeup of 2 electrodes the cathode and the anode).Chloride:Chloride is a common anion, present in both fresh andsea water. It is essentially non-toxic, and is present inall living cells. It has the symbol Cl-.Conductivity:Conductivity is inversely related to the resistance of asolution. Conductivity is the ratio of the electric cur-rent density to the electric field in a material, also knownas electrical conductivity. In limnology, conductivityis a measure of the ability of water to pass an electricalcurrent. Compensation of this measurement to 25 ˚Cconstitutes specific conductance. This parameter indi-cates the amount of dissolved substances (salts). Saltsand their concentration dictate osmoregulatory (salt-bal-ancing) functions in plants and animals. The ionic“strength” of water also regulates the toxicity of manysubstances. (See: Specific conductance)

Data collection platform (or DCP):Hardware system and system software used with a com-puter program to collect data at one or more locations.Depth:(ITM) The vertical distance between the water surfaceand another level (for a multiprobe: 0-10, 0-25, 0-100,or 0-200 meters). (See: Vented depth)Derating:The reduction of the rating of a device to improve reliabil-ity or to predict operation at higher or lower ambient tem-peratures.Dissolved oxygen (or D.O.):A measure of the amount of oxygen present in waterand available for respiration.(ITM) The amount, or concentration, of D.O. is con-trolled by many factors including: consumption by aero-bic (requiring D.O.) organisms (bacteria, fish, amphib-ians, and invertebrates); consumption by plants (algae,vascular plants, particularly during dark hours); andwater temperature, water flow, and depth.Drift:(ITM) The long-term lack of repeatability caused byinfluences such as fouling of the sensor, shifts in thecalibration of the system, or slowly failing sensors.Dump: To copy the contents of all or part of a storage,usually from an internal storage device to an externalstorage device.Eh: (See: Redox potential)Electrode:An electric conductor which either measures the poten-tial of a solution (pH, reference, redox, and ammoniumelectrodes) or forces electric current into or out of asolution (D.O. and conductivity electrodes).Emery cloth:An abrasive cloth or paper with an adherent layer ofemery powder; used to polish and clean metal. (Hy-drolab recommends No. 400 or finer.)


7-4

QUICK REFERENCE

(ITM) Depth, pH, D.O., and specific conductanceare examples of parameters.pH:Term used to describe the hydrogen-ion activity of asystem: pH 0-7: acid solution, pH 7: neutral, pH 7-14: alkaline (or basic) solution. The “p” in pH standsfor power (“puissance”) of the hydrogen ion (H+) ac-tivity.(ITM) pH is a major factor affecting the availabilityof nutrients to plants and animals. It controls in partthe concentration of many biochemically active sub-stances dissolved in water, and it affects the efficiencyof hemoglobin in the blood of vertebrates (e.g. fish)and invertebrates (e.g. shrimp), as well as the toxic-ity of pollutants.Probe:A small tube containing the sensing elements of elec-tronic equipment.(ITM) The probe is an essential part of the waterquality monitoring system, since it can obtain mea-surements and data which can be stored, analyzed,and eventually transferred to a computer.Probe assembly: (See: Assembly)Profiling:Electrical exploration wherein the transmitter and re-ceiver are moved in unison across a structure to ob-tain a profile of mutual impedance between trans-mitter and receiver = lateral search.(ITM) In water quality, this term is used as the con-trary of unattended monitoring. An operator con-nects the multiprobe to a computer equipped with acommunications software. Then, he lowers the mul-tiprobe in the water and receives measurements fromthe instrument. The data is displayed on the com-puter screen. The multiprobe can be lowered to dif-ferent locations along the sample area in order tostudy the nature of the water based on several pointsof reference.Quinhydrone:C

6 H

4 O

2 . C

6 H

4 (OH)

2; green, water-soluble pow-

der.(ITM) Quinhydrone is used to calibrate redox sen-sors. The quinhydrone’s redox potential is dependenton the pH of the solution.

Hysteresis error pH

Ω

Ω

Hysteresis error:The maximum separation due to hysteresis between up-scale- and downscale-going indications of a measuredvalue.(ITM) A difference in parameter readings which occursdue to a variation in the conditions under which the sensorapproached the readings. (See: Response time)Isopotential point:The point at which the ion activity is the same on bothsides of a sensor membrane. At the isopotential points,there is a zero potential across the membrane. The ob-served potential of the sensor may not be zero, due to thedifferences in reference electrodes.Lazy Susan:A large, revolving tray for food, condiments, etc., placedat the center of a dining table.(ITM) Refers to the way and orientation a reel is mountedon a boat to lower and raise the multiprobe.Milliohm (m Ω):Unit of resistance (not conductivity or conductance.)MilliSiemens (mS) = millimho (m ):Units of electrical conductance.Millimho (m ): (See: MilliSiemens)Molar concentration: Molar solution: Aqueous solu-tion that contains one mole (unit = gram-molecularweight) of solute in one liter of water. For example: KCl(potassium chloride) molar concentration.Multiprobe:(ITM) The combination of several sensors, electrodes,or probe assemblies into a complete, stand-alone pieceof equipment which simultaneously measures several pa-rameters for profiling, spot-checking, or logging read-ings and data. A multiprobe is a multiparameter instru-ment.Nitrate:Nitrate is the most oxidized form of nitrogen, and is theprimary form of biologically available nitrogen presentin aerobic environments. Nitrate is a less toxic form ofnitrogen than ammonia, and is readily assimilated byplants and bacteria. It has the symbol NO3-.Oxidation reduction potential (or ORP): (See: Redoxpotential)Parameter:A quantity which is constant under a given set of condi-tions, but may be different under other conditions.

DataSonde® 4 / MiniSonde User’s Manual Revision E

7-5

QUICK REFERENCE

Reading:The indication shown by an instrument.Redox potential = Oxidation-reduction potential (orORP) = Eh:Voltage measured at an inert electrode immersed in a re-versible oxidation-reduction system; measurement of thestate of oxidation of the system.(ITM) The redox potential measures the tendency of elec-trons to “flow” either toward or away from a noble metalelectrode. A substance gains electrons in a reduction re-action and loses electrons in an oxidation reaction. ORPvaries from substance to substance, and oxidation-reduc-tion reactions occur simultaneously, hence the determi-nation of the “potential” rather than of a discrete or quali-tative value. Oxidation and reduction are in a constantstate of flux, continuously seeking equilibrium. Appli-cations for ORP measurement include, but are not lim-ited to, the following: monitoring oxidation of cyanideand chromate wastes (e.g. metal plating), bleaching pulp(e.g. paper manufacturing), manufacture of bleach (e.g.monitoring chlorination), water pollution (e.g. acid minedrainage) and monitoring ozone treatment (e.g. water dis-infection). ORP data has been used to understand moreabout how substances in sediments affect the water qual-ity at the bottom of lakes, reservoirs, and ponds.Reduction:(ITM) A reaction that increases the electron content of asubstance.Reference electrode:A nonpolarizable electrode that generates highly reproduc-ible potentials; used for pH, ORP, and ammonium mea-surements and polarographic analyses (e.g. silver-silverchloride electrode).Resistivity:Resistivity is the electrical resistance offered by a mate-rial to the flow of current, times the cross-sectional areaof current flow and per unit length of current path. It isthe reciprocal of conductivity and is also known as elec-trical resistivity and specific resistance. Resistance de-clines as ion content increases.Response time:(ITM) The time required for a system to react, by aprescribed amount, to a step change in some variable.The extent of the response must be stated, as in “to 95%of total change” or “to within 0.1 mg /l of the final read-

ing” (example for D.O.).Salinity:Salinity is the measure of the total quantity of dis-solved salts in water. Salinity refers to the ionicstrength of natural waters. Salinity and salt concen-tration are the only terms that can be used when re-ferring to the relative concentration of certain saltsin bays, estuaries, and oceans.SDI-12:SDI-12 is a standard used to interface data record-ers with microprocessor-based sensors. SDI-12stands for serial-digital interface at 1200 baud. SDI-12 is intended for applications with the followingrequirements: battery-powered operation with mini-mal current drain, low system cost, use of a singledata recorder with multiple sensors on one cable,and up to 200 feet of cable between a sensor and adata recorder.Sensor:The generic name for a device that senses either theabsolute value or a change in a physical quantitysuch as temperature, pressure, flow rate, or pH, andconverts that change into a useful input signal foran information-gathering system.Service loop:A loop in a wire or cable to reduce the load on thewire or cable.Slope:Slope is the operation applied to the system’s re-sponse once the zero has been set. Slope is a mea-sure of the sensitivity of a sensor. Slope scales thesensor’s output to the correct units. (Also see: Zero)Specific conductance = conductivity at 25 ˚C:The ratio of the electric current density to the elec-tric field in a material. The ability of a fluid toconduct electricity. Specific conductance is theinverse of electrical resistivity, corrected at 25 ˚C,since fluids conduct more at higher temperatures.Spot-checking:The collection of data using readings at irregu-lar intervals.Temperature:(ITM) A measure of heat present in water. Aside fromdissolved oxygen, temperature is considered the singlemost important parameter. Knowledge of water tem-

Reading Salinity


7-6

QUICK REFERENCE

perature is essential to the measurement of dissolved oxy-gen, conductivity (salinity), pH, alkalinity, biological/bio-chemical oxygen (needed to meet the metabolic needs ofaerobic - requiring D.O. - organisms) and virtually everyother water quality parameter. Temperature controls me-tabolism (utilization of inorganic and organic matter forlife processes) of aquatic animals and plants. Tempera-ture is largely responsible for biochemical reactions and isone of the most important cues for beginning and endingof spawning, migration, and many other phenomena.Titration:A method of analyzing the composition of a solution byadding known amounts of standardized solution until agiven reaction - color change, precipitation, or conduc-tivity change - is produced.(ITM) Winkler titration (in calibration): A wet chemi-cal method for estimating the D.O. in water.Tolerance:Used to refer to the maximum difference between thetrue value of a parameter and the actual “operator-ac-ceptable” reading. Usually used as a synonym for accu-racy.Total dissolved gas (or TDG):The amount of gaseous compounds dissolved in a liquid.Total dissolved solids (or TDS):Total dissolved solids refer to the amount of materials ina body of water that are either dissolved or too small tobe filtered. These solids include ions, which are impor-tant to the internal water balance in aquatic organisms.(ITM) The amount of substances (calculated in Kg/l) dis-solved in one liter of water. A measure primarily of alka-line earth metals and their salts dissolved or in very finesuspension. This parameter provides information regard-ing the potential buffering capacity of water, water hard-ness, and the potential lethality of toxins. The concen-tration of dissolved solids affects osmoregulation (saltbalancing) and is often a cue for migration and spawn-ing. TDS concentration affects the buoyancy of fish eggsand other organisms.Transducer:Any device or element which converts an input signalinto an output signal of a different form (ex: doorbell,microphone,...). (ITM) The depth or vented level trans-ducer.

Temperature Turbidity

Turbidity:The measure of the clarity of a liquid by using colo-rimetric scales. It is also the expression of the opti-cal property that causes a light to be scattered andabsorbed rather than transmitted in straight linesthrough a sample. Turbidity is the opposite of clar-ity.(ITM) A measure of the opacity or translucence ofwater. Turbidity is measured by several methods.The main objective is to determine the scattering oflight by particles of a body of water and report thatscattering in some unit of measurement, usuallynephelometric turbidity units (or NTU) based on aprimary turbidity standard called formazin. Turbid-ity is caused by plankton (both animal and plant),clay, suspended clay, silt, etc. Although these sub-stances impart “color”, color resulting from turbid-ity is referred to as “apparent color” and should notbe confused with true color (resulting from dissolvedsubstances). Apparent color can also result fromovershading by vegetation or substrate (bottom ma-terial) color.Vented depth:(ITM) The multiprobe transducer measuring depthfrom 0 to 10 meters. (See: Depth)Zero:(ITM) A system’s “zero” is an anchor point set ei-ther temporarily by calibration or permanently bydesign. This point can easily be established eitherelectronically or by using laboratory standards. (Alsosee: Slope)


7-7

QUICK REFERENCE

dradnatSserutaef

dellatsni-yrotcaFserutaeflanoitpo

noisremmimumixaM)ylnorosneshtpedhtiw(

reggolatadlanretnI

htiwsgnidaeRdelbanesretemaraplla

)PBI(kcapyrettablanretnI

elbaegrahcerlanretxE)HA6-PBR(V21,kcapyrettab

)GSW(draugrosnesdethgieW

ylbmessareniaterrosnesGDT

elbacretawrednU

elbacelbahcateD

elbacdexiF

retpadarewoplanretxE

elbacregrahc4royevruS

retpadarewop4royevruS

retpadaCPot4royevruS

gulptropdnatropnoisnapxE

roelbaliavAelbitapmoc

ecafretnidradnatSnoitcennocro

MBI elppA, CPrehto,atadgnirots&gniweivrof

royevruS :reggoLyalpsiD4gniggol&,gnikcehc-tops,gniliforprof

)noitporetpadamedomhtiw(sseccaetomermedoM

noitcellocatadetomerreggolatadytrap-drihT

MBI+elbaC+21-IDSgnisU elppA, CPrehtoro,

erawtfossnoitacinummocagnisUsulPmmoCorP( 232-SR+)CProf

TABLE 6: INTERFACES AND CONNECTIONS

TABLE 7: FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES

5. Equipment characteristicsThe following tables give you an overview of the standard and optional instrument interfaces, connec-tions, features, accessories, sensors, and parameters compatible or available on your multiprobe.

ü ü

ü ü

ü ü

ü ü

ü ü

ü ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü


7-8

QUICK REFERENCE

dradnatSdellatsni-yrotcaF

lanoitpO

erutarepmeT ü

)retemarapaton(ytivitcudnoC ü

ecnatcudnoccificepS * ü

ytivitsiseR * ü

)SDT(sdilosdevlossidlatoT * ü

ytinilaS * ü

).O.D(negyxodevlossiD ü

HpdradnatS ü

Hphtgnertscinoi-woL ü

sedortcelecificeps-noI ü

)PRO(xodeR ü

,)tf28(m52-0)detnev-non(htpeD)tf656-0(m002-0dna,)tf823(m001-0 ü

)tf33-0(m01-0htpeddetneV ü

)GDT(sagdevlossidlatoT ü

ytidibruT ü

ainommAdnamuinommA * ü

TABLE 8: SENSORS AND PARAMETERS

* denotes that this parameter is not a sensor. The rest of the entries are sensors and parameters.


7-9

QUICK REFERENCE

6. Expected battery life information and currentsYour multiprobe uses several different battery types. These batteries, their corresponding voltage,purpose, equipment they are used in, and their expected life are presented in the chart below and on thenext pages. Hydrolab uses Duracell® batteries for its battery tests and estimates, including the follow-ing calculations and results. With a different name brand, results may vary.

TABLE 9: EXPECTED BATTERY LIFE

EPYTYRETTAB EGATLOV ESOPRUP EFILDETCEPXE NOITACOL

muihtiL V3 rewopkcolC sraey2 BCP4SDdnaSM

enilaklaCeziS4SD)deriuqer8(

V5.1 rewoplanretnI )1( 4SD

enilaklaAAeziSSM)deriuqer4(

V5.1 rewoplanretnI )1( SM

Battery packs

DataSonde 4 internal battery pack (IBP)This self-contained waterproof battery compartment is installed in the DataSonde 4. The IBP providesoperating power. (1)

When replacing batteries, make sure that all battery contact areas are free from dirt, oil, or othercontaminants. Clean and dry all soiled or wet areas (see chapter 5 under “Internal battery replace-ment” for details).

MiniSonde internal batteriesThis self-contained waterproof battery compartment is installed in the MiniSonde. The batteries insidethe compartment provide an independent source of power. They consist of 4 or 8 size AA nonrechargeablealkaline batteries that power the multiprobe during unattended operation. (1)

When replacing batteries, make sure that all battery contact areas are free from dirt, oil, or othercontaminants. Clean and dry all soiled or wet areas (see chapter 5 under “Internal battery replace-ment” for details).

External rechargeable battery pack (RBP-6AH)This battery pack can provide continuous power for the multiprobe.(1) The RBP-6AH is recommended forfield operation and can be used in a laboratory. Connect your instruments with a calibration, a detach-able, or a fixed cable. The last two cables also need to be connected to an external power adapter.

___________________________1) See following pages for detailed information.


7-10

QUICK REFERENCE

Lithium battery

This battery has different discharge characteristics from alkaline batteries. Refer to this battery’sexpected life in the table on the previous page when determining replacement intervals.

Frequently asked questions and battery life tables

Q: How long will the batteries in my multiprobe last? (1)

A: Battery life depends on your instrument’s use (continuous operation, with or without thecirculator, etc.) Expected battery lives for continuous operation at 25 ˚C (2) follow. If yourdata collection is critical, consider shorter deployments and test your assumptions.

The DataSonde 4 internal battery pack (or IBP) requires 8 size C alkaline batteries that are user-re-placeable but not rechargeable. The external battery pack is the Hydrolab rechargeable battery pack (orRBP-6AH) (3).

The multiprobe sensor configuration for the tables below is as follows: temperature, pH, ORP, conduc-tivity, D.O., nitrates, and depth, with or without the circulator. For the following tables, it is assumedthat the circulator warmup time is set equal to the sensor warm-up time.

TABLE 10: DATASONDE 4 BATTERY LIFE WITHOUT THE CIRCULATOR OPERATING

Notes: (1) Hydrolab uses Duracell alkaline batteries at 25 ˚C for its battery tests and estimates, including the above calcula-tions and results. With a different name brand and/or type, results may vary.

(2) RBP-6AH: you will notice a 20% derating if you are operating at -5 ˚C. DS4-IBP and MS-IBP: you will notice a25% derating if you are operating at 0 ˚C.

(3) Hydrolab’s external battery pack is rated at 12 volts DC, 7 Amp-hours. Other 12 volt batteries may be used.

lavretnI).nim(

pu-mraW).nim(

lanretnI4SD)syad(

lanretxE4SD)syad(

suounitnoC A/N 11 31

51 2 68 59

51 5.0 313 443

03 2 761 381

03 5.0 755 116

06 2 313 443

06 5.0 119 999

021 2 755 116

021 5.0 4331 4641


7-11

QUICK REFERENCE

TABLE 11: DATASONDE 4 BATTERY LIFE WITH THE CIRCULATOR OPERATING

The MiniSonde internal batteries consist of 4 or 8 size AA alkaline batteries that are user-replaceable butnot rechargeable. The external battery pack is the Hydrolab rechargeable battery pack (RBP-6AH) (1).

TABLE 12: MINISONDE BATTERY LIFE WITHOUT THE CIRCULATOR OPERATING

Notes: (1) Hydrolab’s external battery pack is rated at 12 volts DC, 7 Amp-hours. Other 12 volt batteries may be used.

lavretnI).nim(

pu-mraW).nim(

lanretnI4SD)syad(

lanretxE4SD)syad(

C suounitno A/N 8 9

51 2 26 86

51 5.0 232 552

03 2 121 331

03 5.0 524 664

06 2 232 552

06 5.0 627 797

021 2 524 664

021 5.0 5211 4321

lavretnI).nim(

pu-mraW).nim(

'AA'4SM)syad(

'AA'8SM)syad(

lanretxESM)syad(

suounitnoC A/N 2 4 31

51 2 31 13 59

51 5.0 84 411 443

03 2 62 16 381

03 5.0 68 302 116

06 2 84 411 443

06 5.0 141 233 999

021 2 68 302 116

021 5.0 702 784 4641


7-12

QUICK REFERENCE

TABLE 13: MINISONDE BATTERY LIFE WITH THE CIRCULATOR OPERATING

TABLE 14: DATASONDE 4 AND MINISONDE POWER SUPPLY CURRENTS (AT 12 VDC)

* The multiprobe sensor configuration for this table is: temperature, pH, ORP, con-ductivity, D.O., nitrates, and depth.

lavretnI).nim(

pu-mraW).nim(

'AA'4SM)syad(

'AA'8SM)syad(

lanretxESM)syad(

suounitnoC A/N 1 3 9

51 2 9 22 86

51 5.0 63 48 552

03 2 91 44 331

03 5.0 66 551 664

06 2 63 48 552

06 5.0 311 562 797

021 2 66 551 664

021 5.0 571 114 4321

edomgnitarepO *tnerrucylppusSM/4SD

)delbasidIDS(peelS/ybdnatS 001-07 µA

ybdnatS584SR/224-SR 005-053 µA

)delbaneIDS(peelS/ybdnatS Am1-7.0

)rotalucrictuohtiw(edoM232SR Am52-02

)rotalucrichtiw(edoM232SR Am53-52

)rotalucrictuohtiw(584-SR/224-SR Am52-02

)rotalucrichtiw(584-SR/224-SR Am53-52

”esnopserdnammoc“edomIDS Am51-01

µ

µ


7-13

QUICK REFERENCE

7. Battery replacement

For internal battery replacement, refer to the chapter 5, under “Internal battery replacement.”

! WARNING: When loosening removable parts from the multiprobe, alwayspoint those parts away from your body and other people. In ex-treme conditions, excess pressure may build up inside any under-water housing, causing the caps, sensors, or other removable partsto disengage with force sufficient to cause serious injury.

Multiprobe lithium battery replacement

Your multiprobe is equipped with a lithium battery which powers the multiprobe’s internal clock.The expected life for this battery is 2 years. We recommend replacing the lithium battery beforethe end of this two-year period. Note that there is no loss of data if the battery “dies”.

What do I need to replace the lithium battery?

• Silicone grease• 1 lithium battery (Panasonic reference: CR 2032, or equivalent)• 1 Allen wrench (provided in the MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit)• 1 standard screwdriver

Steps to follow

Refer to the figures 7-1 to 7-9 on the following pages, when replacing the lithium battery.

STEP 1: To remove the multiprobe sensor cap, unscrew the Allen screws with the Allenwrench. To facilitate removal on the DataSonde 4, insert the screwdriver’s head into the notcheson the multiprobe’s housing at the bottom of the sensor cap.

STEP 2: To avoid damaging the PCB, slowly pull the sensor cap straight out of the multi-probe housing.


7-14

QUICK REFERENCE

STEP 3: Detach the 10-pin connector.

STEP 4: To remove the battery, slide your thumbnail under the battery clip. Pull the clip awayfrom the battery and let the battery slide out of the clip and fall on the work surface.

STEP 5: Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity: match the “+” on the battery with the“+” on the battery clip. Reattach the 10-pin connector. To facilitate the connector’s reattach-ment, close the two black retainer clips halfway before inserting the 10-pin connector.

STEP 6: Apply some silicone grease on the sensor cap o-rings. To insert the PCB and sensorcap assembly, carefully align the board with its compartment.

STEP 7: Tighten the Allen screws. Do not overtighten.

STEP 8: Reset the time and date after replacing the lithium battery. To do so, go to the HLmenu on your computer screen, under System, Clock, Set-Date, and Set-Time. Then, enter thetime at your location and press ENTER.


7-15

QUICK REFERENCE

1234567890123456789012345678901212345612345678901234567890123456789012123456123456789012345678901234567890121234561234567890123456789012345678901212345612345678901234567890123456789012123456123456789012345678901234567890121234561234567890123456789012345678901212345612345678901234567890123456789012123456

1234567890123456789012345678901212345612345678901234567890123456789012123456123456789012345678901234567890121234561234567890123456789012345678901212345612345678901234567890123456789012123456123456789012345678901234567890121234561234567890123456789012345678901212345612345678901234567890123456789012123456

10-pin connector(with wires)

printed circuit board (PCB)

retainerclips (2)

STEP 3 FIG. 7-2 & 7-3

Allen screw

notch

multiprobe’s housing multiprobesensor cap

STEPS 1-2 FIG. 7-1

wires

ladder

PCB


7-16

QUICK REFERENCE

1234567890123456789012345678901212345612345678901234567890123456789012123456123456789012345678901234567890121234561234567890123456789012345678901212345612345678901234567890123456789012123456123456789012345678901234567890121234561234567890123456789012345678901212345612345678901234567890123456789012123456

lithium battery battery clip

PCB

battery clip

STEP 4 FIG. 7-4 & 7-5 (TOP AND SIDE VIEW)

Pan

ason

icC

R 2

032

3V

123456789012345678901234567890121234567123456789012345678901234567890121234567123456789012345678901234567890121234567123456789012345678901234567890121234567123456789012345678901234567890121234567123456789012345678901234567890121234567123456789012345678901234567890121234567123456789012345678901234567890121234567

STEP 5 FIG. 7-6 & 7-7

STEPS 6-7 FIG. 7-8 & 7-9

PCB


7-17

QUICK REFERENCE

8. Multiprobe error message directory

The following table provides you with a quick reference for general error messages that may appear onyour computer screen when working with the multiprobe. The menu tree column refers to the generalmenu where the error message can be found, not to the specific place or places where it is displayed.

TABLE 15: ERROR MESSAGES

egasseM eertuneM gninaeM

...ecnarelotfotuosinoitarbilaC etarbilaCehtrofrebmungnorwehtderetneuoY

ehtretneerotdeenuoY.tinurodradnats.enotcerroc

...dellecnaC sserpuoyemitynA csE .

...yrtnedilavnI nigoLuoY.rebmungnorwehtderetneevahuoY

ehtretnednaerudecorpehttaeperotdeen.enotcerroc

sihtrofelbaliavatonnoitarbilaC.retemarap

etarbilaCoduoY.detarbilac-yrotcafsiretemarapsihT

.retemarapsihtetarbilacotdeenton

...yekynasserP!LLUFsiyrotceriD seliFeteledotdeenuoY.llufsiyrotceridselifruoY

.moorekamotseliferomroenorefsnartro

!tsoleblliwataD:GNINRAW seliFerauoyelifehtrevocerotelbaebt'nowuoY

sserP.eteledottuoba csE .trobaot

.retemarapsihtrofelbaliavatonputeS puteS .putesynaeriuqertonseodretemarapsihT

!rorrEtnemerusaeMerawdraH )enilsutatS(

tcerrocniatbootelbanusieborpitlumehTlacinhceTbalordyHllaC.stnemerusaem

dna.A.S.Uehtni(6673-949-008tatroppuS.1488-552)215(ro)ylnoadanaC

foedistuoerasgnidaerretemaraP!egnarelbawolla

)lareveS(niatrecarofnekatebtonnacgnidaerA

dnaserudecorpnoitarbilacweiveR.retemarap)mumixamdnamuminim(segnarrosneskcehc


7-18

QUICK REFERENCE

9. ProComm Plus for DOS basic commands

Hydrolab sells and uses Datastorm Technologies, Incorporated’s ProComm Plus® communica-tions software. This software provides all features required to communicate with Hydrolabinstruments. You will only need a working knowledge of this software to set up communica-tions between your multiprobe and your computer.

When installing ProComm Plus, accept all defaults and let the software update your CONFIG.SYSand AUTOEXEC.BAT files. You should set up for “direct connection”. Type PCPLUS at theprompt, then press ENTER. To enter terminal mode, press any key. Set the terminal to: ANSIterminal emulation, 19200 baud, eight bits, no parity, and one stop bit (19200, N, 8, 1). Hard-ware flow control (RTS/CTS) must be disabled and software flow control (XON/XOFF) must beenabled. To do so with ProComm Plus, press Alt+S and select Terminal options within thisscreen. Turn OFF the hardware flow control and turn ON the software flow control.

NOTE: If you are using a 100 meter or longer cable, you need to set your terminal baud rate to 9600 to

accommodate data transmission over such lengths.

After entering terminal mode, connect your multiprobe to the correct communications port ofyour computer. Note the status line along the bottom of your screen. To display or hide thisstatus line, press Ctrl+] . This line tells you important information about the communicationsstatus. To access the on-line help screen, type the following key sequence when in terminalmode, Alt+Z.

The primary commands and setup information for configuring ProComm Plus to communicatewith your multiprobe are listed in a table format on the next page.

Although there are many other ProComm Plus commands, setup, and features, the ones listedin the next table should be sufficient to communicate with or recover information from yourmultiprobe.


7-19

QUICK REFERENCE

TABLE 16: PROCOMM PLUS COMMANDS

* For a more complete list of ProComm Plus commands, refer to your ProComm Plus User’s Manual.

P SSER RO

ENIBMOC :TO:

X+TLA sulPmmoCorPtixE .

Z+TLAybdereffoserutaefehtweiverotemitruoyekaT.neercsplehenil-noehtpugnirB

.sulPmmoCorP

P+TLAdetacol)s(yekehtsserpretemarapynatcelesoT.unemputestrop/enilehtpugnirB

etoN.retemarapehtfotfelehtot SGNITTESTNERRUC ehttcelesuoysaegnahcsserpsgnittesesehtevasoT.sretemarapsuoirav S+TLA .

S+TLA.tnemnorivneruoytiusotsulPmmoCorPerugifnocotdesusunemputesehtpugnirB

rofseirotceridtluafedputesdnaepytlanimretehttcelesotuoyswollaerutaefsihT.selifdedaolnwoddnaseliferutpac

L+TLA .noretnirpehtnruT

1F+TLA

ehtmorf)"spmud"ro(srefsnartydaer-tnirperotsoteliferutpacehtelbanEylnouoyfI.elifksidaotdevieceryltnerrucgniebatadehtgolotro,eborpitlum

rednudevaseblliwdevieceratadeht",emanelif"rofdeksanehwemanelifaretneuoyfI.)yrotceridSULPCPehtylbaborp(yrotceridSODtnerrucehtniemaneliftaht

sserptsuj RETNE elifehtotnioglliwatadeht,emaneliftluafedehttpeccadna"ees(putesehtnideificepseman S+TLA tluafedehtniatadevahydaerlauoyfI.)"

.atadgnitsixeehtotdeddaeblliwatadweneht,elif

nwoDegaPro nDgP

teehsdaerpsanieborpitlumehtmorfatadgnirrefsnartnehwelifdaolnwodehtnepOfI.emanelifehtgnidulcnihtapetelpmocehtroemanelifaretnetsumuoY.tamrofdeifitnediyrotceridtluafedehtnidevaseblliwatadeht,emanelifehtretneylnouoy

.deificepsuoyemanelifehtrednuputesruoyni

B+TLAotdesuebnacdnammocsihT.eciveddehcattaehtotdnammockaerbehtdneS

.lavomerrewoptuohtiweborpitlumehttratser

4F+TLA

otnruteroT.gnitratsertuohtiwsulPmmoCorPdnatpmorpSODehtneewtebelggoTniepyttsuj,edomlanimret tixE sserpneht RETNE kcehcotlufplehsierutaefsihT.

deificepsehtotniderrefsnartsawatadehtfiyfirevotdna,nierauoyyrotceridhcihw"dnammocSODehtesutsuj,elifehtweivoT.elif EPYT yrotceridehtybdewollof"

:xE.emanelifdnahtap emanelif\atad\sulpcp\:cEPYT .

V+TLA.refsnarteliftnecerafostluserehtweivotdesuebnacerutaefsihT.elifaweiV

ehtfodaetsnidesuebnacdnammocsihT "EPYT"4F+TLA .evobadnammoc


7-20

QUICK REFERENCE

10. HyperTerminal basic commands

If you are using Windows 95, you will probably prefer to use HyperTerminal instead of the communi-cations software Hydrolab provides with your initial shipment. This software also allows communi-cate with Hydrolab instruments. You will only need a working knowledge of this software to setup communications between your multiprobe and your computer.

After launching Windows 95, go to Start, then Programs, HyperTerminal , and finally click on thislast choice. In HyperTerminal, you can create an icon that will preserve your settings for future use.Let’s double click on the Hypertrm icon and enter a new icon name under Name and click OK . Then,in the next window, go to Connect using and select your Direct to COM port (select a COM port) andclick OK .

Your next window should look like this:

Although there are many other HyperTerminal commands, setup, and features, the ones listedabove and in the next table should be sufficient to communicate with or recover informationfrom your multiprobe.

Port Settings

Bits per second:

Data bits:

Parity:

Stop bits:

Flow control:

19200

8

None

1

Xon/Xoff

Advanced... Restore Defaults

OK Cancel Apply

?????


7-21

QUICK REFERENCE

TABLE 17: HYPERTERMINAL COMMANDS

* When you are in “HyperTerminal” mode.

NOTE: HyperTerminal should be configured so that the functions, arrows, and Ctrl keys

act as terminal keys, not window keys. Also, be sure to select the ANSI terminalemulation. These setup options are located under the File: Properties: Settings.

F WOLLO EHT HTAP :* TO:

H :ple H :scipoTplelanimreTrepyH:xednI

.ytilituplehenil-noehtpugnirB

F P:eli r :seitrepo:rebmunenohP

noC f :erugiM deepsmumixa

.)spb00291.g.e(deepsrefsnarts'medomruoytcelesdnasseccA

F P:eli r :seitrepo:rebmunenohP

noC f :eruginoitcennoC

.)1,8,N.g.e(sgnittesnoitcennocehttcelesdnasseccA

T :refsnar C txeTerutpa.evirddrahaotroksidaotdevieceryltnerrucatadehtgolot,eliferutpacaelbanE

.htapadnaemanelifarofdetpmorpeblliwuoY

F :eli C retnirpoterutpa .noretnirpehtnruT

T :refsnar S eliFdnedetpmorpeblliwuoY.)medomX.g.e(locotorprefsnartehtesoohcdnaelifadaolpU

.htapadnaemanelifarof

T :refsnar R eliFevieceeblliwuoY.)medomX.g.e(locotorprefsnartehtesoohcdnaelifadaolnwoD

.htapadnaemanelifarofdetpmorp

F :eli O nep .redloflanimreTrepyHruoynidevasdnadetaercuoyelifadnifroelifaweivoT


7-22

QUICK REFERENCE

11. Menu trees

We suggest that you take a close look at the multiprobe menu trees on the followingpages and refer to the appropriate one(s) whenever you need to communicate with yourmultiprobe.

Due to the number of functions and choices within the menu structure, we have dividedthe menu hierarchy into nine menu trees, as follows:

1. Main Menu tree (the first level of communication with your multiprobe)

2. HL tree (for basic system and maitenance information)

3. Login tree (security levels and passwords)

4. Setup tree 1 (system information)

5. Setup tree 2 (parameter display information and file capture)

6. Setup tree 3 (parameter display, I/O, and sensors’ information)

7. Calibrate tree (for parameter calibration)

8. Files tree (to create, transfer, delete, review the status of files, and the Autolog feature)

9. Software tree (for main or driver software installation)

Please note that due to your multiprobe’s specific configuration, some of the menu andsubmenu items may differ from and/or be missing from your multiprobe’s screens asthey appear on your computer. For instance, if you have purchased a multiprobe withoutthe logging feature, the Files menu will not appear on your display and on the statusline, Logging: Armed/Off will be replaced with Logging: N/A.

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde User’s M

anual Revision C

7-23

QU

ICK R

EF

ER

EN

CE

Multiprobe menu and submenu tree structureMain Menu tree

HL

Main Menu

Login

Setup

Calibrate

Files

Software

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde User’s M

anual Revision C

7-24

QU

ICK R

EF

ER

EN

CE

HL tree

The sensors’ order and name may vary depending on theparameters that you have installed in your multiprobe.

HL

General

MainSensors

Instrumentconfiguration

User-Service

Sensorchannel,

name, andrevision

level

Service andmaintenance

messages

* A number (10, 25, 100, or 200) should be displayedafter Depth, showing your multiprobe’s depth option.

Temp

Ions-1

Ions-2

Cond

TDG

Oxygen

Depth*

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde User’s M

anual Revision E

7-25

QU

ICK R

EF

ER

EN

CE

Login tree

Level-1

Login

Level-0 Level-2 Level-3

Passwordrequired

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde User’s M

anual Revision E

7-26

QU

ICK R

EF

ER

EN

CE

Setup tree (1)



Clock Circulator Audio Security Id Reset

Set-Date On On Password Main Sensor

Set-Time Off Off Default- Temp Level

Ions-1

Ions-2

Cond

TDG

Oxygen

Depth*

Date-Format

Battery-Type

Setup

System

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde User’s M

anual Revision E

7-27

QU

ICK R

EF

ER

EN

CE

CL-:mg/l

CL-:mV

Setup tree (2)


Setup

ORP:mV

NH4+:mg/l-N

NH4Tot:mg/l-N

NO3-:mg/l-N

NH4+:mV

NO3-:mV Add

Remove

Ions-2

Add

Remove

Battery

External-batteryInternal-battery

Radix

CommaDecimal-Point

Parameters TTYDate-Time Capture

TimeDate

Interval

Add RemoveAdd RemoveAdd RemoveRemoveAdd

IntBatt:%Left ExtBatt:%Left

RemoveAddRemoveAdd

Display

Temp Ions-1 Cond TDG

Temp:˚C Temp:˚F Temp:˚K pH:Units SpCond: SpCond: Res: Sal:ppt TDS:g/l TDG: TDG:mS/cm µS/cm KΩ-cm mmHg psia

Add Add Add Add Add Add Add Add Add Add

Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde User’s M

anual Revision E

7-28

QU

ICK R

EF

ER

EN

CE

Setup tree (3)


Setup


List ofparameters

BP:mmHg

Add

Remove

Multidrop

Display I/O Parameters Sensors

Oxygen Depth* SDI-Address

D.O.: D.O.: Depth*: Depth*: Depth*: SDI-%Sat mg/l Meters Feet psi Delay

Add Add Add Add Add MODBUS-Address

Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Terminal-BaudRate

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde User’s M

anual Revision E

7-29

QU

ICK R

EF

ER

EN

CE

Calibrate tree



NH4+:mg/l-N

NH4Tot:mg/l-N

NO3-:mg/l-N

NH4+:mV

NO3-:mV

Ions-2

CL-:mg/l

CL-:mVORP:mV

pH:Units

Calibrate

Temp Ions-1 Cond TDG Oxygen Depth*

Temp:˚C SpCond: TDG: D.O.: Depth*:mS/cm mmHg %Sat Meters

Temp:˚F SpCond: TDG: D.O.: Depth*:uS/cm psia mg/l Feet

Temp:˚K Res: BP: Depth*:KΩ-cm mmHg psi

Sal:ppt

TDS:g/l

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde User’s M

anual Revision E

7-30

QU

ICK R

EF

ER

EN

CE

Files tree

Create

Files

Transfer

Status

Delete

AutoLog

Off

On

Setup

DataS

onde ® 4 / MiniS

onde User’s M

anual Revision B

7-31

QU

ICK R

EF

ER

EN

CE

Software tree

Software

Temp

Ions-1

Cond

TDG

Oxygen

Depth*

Main Sensor



Ions-2


APPENDIX 1:SERVICE AND WARRANTY FORMS

This first appendix contains all the necessary forms to return your instrumentsfor service or repairs. Make sure you follow the directions on these forms andfill out all the requested information.

You will also find a limited 2-year warranty form detailing the coverage period,related information, and service and shipping instructions. An extended war-ranty is now available from Hydrolab Sales Department, please call our toll-freelines at 800-949-3766 (in the United States of America and Canada only) or youcan also dial (512) 255-8841.

For your convenience, we have provided some self-adhesive shipping labelsplaced at the end of this manual in the inside back pocket.

SERVICE, REPAIR, AND RETURN FORM

When calling, please have the following informationreadily available to speed up your request:

1. Instrument type (e.g. Datasonde 4): ____________________________

2. Model and serial number: (on the tag found on your instrument)

oooooo (5 or 6 Numbers)

3. Parameters’ settings (in the Main Menu, under SetupSetupSetupSetupSetup and DisplayDisplayDisplayDisplayDisplay for themultiprobes, and under Tabular:DisplayTabular:DisplayTabular:DisplayTabular:DisplayTabular:Display for the Surveyor 4):____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. Deployment and site information: ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When returning your instrument for service, proceedaccording to the following steps:

STEP 1: Call Hydrolab’s Technical Support to obtain a returned good’s authoriza-tion (RGA) number. Dial 800-949-3766 (in the United States of Americaand Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.

STEP 2: Complete a service memorandum.

STEP 3: Properly pack and protect all connectors with protective plugs and thesensors with the storage cup (fill the cup with 1 inch of water maximum).

STEP 4: Carefully package your instrument for shipping.

STEP 5: Legibly write the RGA number on the outside of the shipping box.

When calling to inquire about the status of a repairor return, please provide the RGA number.

LOOK

LOOK

LOOK

SERVICE, REPAIR, AND RETURN FORM

When calling, please have the following informationreadily available to speed up your request:

1. Instrument type (e.g. Datasonde 4): ____________________________

2. Model and serial number: (on the tag found on your instrument)

oooooo (5 or 6 Numbers)

3. Parameters’ settings (in the Main Menu, under SetupSetupSetupSetupSetup and DisplayDisplayDisplayDisplayDisplay for themultiprobes, and under Tabular:DisplayTabular:DisplayTabular:DisplayTabular:DisplayTabular:Display for the Surveyor 4):____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4. Deployment and site information: ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When returning your instrument for service, proceedaccording to the following steps:

STEP 1: Call Hydrolab’s Technical Support to obtain a returned good’s authoriza-tion (RGA) number. Dial 800-949-3766 (in the United States of Americaand Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.

STEP 2: Complete a service memorandum.

STEP 3: Properly pack and protect all connectors with protective plugs and thesensors with the storage cup (fill the cup with 1 inch of water maximum).

STEP 4: Carefully package your instrument for shipping.

STEP 5: Legibly write the RGA number on the outside of the shipping box.

When calling to inquire about the status of a repairor return, please provide the RGA number.

LOOK

LOOK

LOOK

The following information is requested in order to process your order for warranty or non-warrantyservice. Please include this form, fully completed, with your return shipment.

Customer Contact Name ________________________________________________________________________________

Customer Phone Number _______________________________________________________ Ext. _________________

Customer FAX Number _______________________________________________________

Customer E-Mail Number _______________________________________________________

I can be reached by phone during these hours : __________________________________________________________

Address for return City ____________________________________________________________________________

shipment of State ___________________________________________________________________________

repaired equipment. Zip _____________________________________________________________________________

Address for billing _________________________________________________________________________________

(or purchase authority) _________________________________________________________________________________

for repair charges City ____________________________________________________________________________

not covered State ___________________________________________________________________________

by warranty. Zip ____________________________________________________________________________

In the event that your

equipment is NOT Method of payment: VISA/MC P.O. No. ___________________________

under a Hydrolab Other _______________________________________

warranty, please fill in If charges are less than $_______ , proceed with work; otherwise please call me first.

this information:

R.G.A. No. ________________

Date Shipped to Hydrolab ____________________

HYDROLAB CORPORATION

P.O. Box 50116 Austin, TX 78763 U.S.A. • Street: 12921 Burnet Rd. Austin, TX 78727

Phone (512) 255-8841 or 800-949-3766 • FAX (512) 255-3106

SERVICE MEMORANDUM

SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS – Please refer to the instructions given under the SERVICE and LIMITED 2-YEAR WARRANTY form (found after this SERVICE MEMORANDUM) before packaging your instrument forshipment to Hydrolab.

Address each carton to: HYDROLAB CORPORATIONSERVICE DEPARTMENT12921 BURNET ROADAUSTIN, TX 78727 U.S.A.

Clearly mark each box with: R.G.A. No. __________________Carton # ________ of _________

Note:Please install protective plugs

and fill storage cupswith 1 inch of water

maximum.

IMPORTANT: Please include RGA# on your purchase order.Describe equipment symptoms on the reverse side of this memorandum.

INVENTORY OF EQUIPMENT BEING RETURNED

Instrument Type and Description Serial No.

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

Description of Symptom(s) or Explanation(Thorough descriptions can increase the speed of the repair.)

Please include how the instrument was being used (application) when symptom occurred.

SERVICE and LIMITED 2-YEAR WARRANTY

SERVICE and SHIPPING

LIMITED 2-YEAR WARRANTY

Call for more assistance: 800-949-3766* HYDROLAB CORPORATIONP.O. Box 50116 / Austin, Texas / 78763

800-949-3766* or 512-255-8841 / FAX 512-255-3106

All Hydrolab instruments are manufactured in Austin, Texas, U.S.A.AN EXTENDED WARRANTY IS NOW AVAILABLE, PLEASE CALL HYDROLAB FOR DETAILS.

THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY MADE BY HYDROLAB CORPORA-TION AND ACCEPTED BY PURCHASER IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERWARRANTIES. HYDROLAB EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHERWARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANT-ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WHETHERWRITTEN OR ORAL, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY. HYDRO-LAB DOES NOT ASSUME ANY OTHER LIABILITIES IN CONNECTIONWITH ANY PRODUCT.

What Is CoveredThis warranty statement applies specifically to the MiniSonde®, DataSonde®4,DataSonde®3, Recorder™, NH4 Plus™ Recorder™, H20®, Reporter™ andH20®G Multiprobes, the Surveyor®4, Surveyor®3, and Scout®2 Data Displays,and all Hydrolab instruments introduced to market after January 1, 1991, unlessspecifically excluded in the warranty statement.

What Is Not CoveredThis warranty does not apply to products or parts thereof which may be used orconnected to Hydrolab equipment but which are not manufactured by Hydrolab.Our obligation to repair or replace dissolved oxygen or ion-specific electrodesdoes not apply to those that have been consumed through normal use. Thiswarranty specifically excludes batteries of any type.

This warranty does not apply to products or parts thereof which have beenaltered or repaired outside of a Hydrolab factory or other authorized servicecenter, or products damaged by improper installation or application, or subjectedto misuse, abuse, neglect or accident.

What We Will DoAll new Hydrolab products listed above are warranted by Hydrolab againstdefects in materials and workmanship for two years (or for the term of anoptional extended warranty) from date of invoice. During the warranty period,we will repair or, at our option, replace at no charge a product that proves to bedefective provided that you return the product, shipping prepaid, to Hydrolab.Hydrolab’s liability and obligations in connection with any defects in materialsand workmanship are expressly limited to repair or replacement, and your soleand exclusive remedy in the event of such defects shall be repair or replacement.

Hydrolab’s obligations under this warranty are conditional upon it receivingprompt written notice of claimed defects within the warranty period and itsobligations are expressly limited to repair or replacement as stated above.

What We Will Not DoHydrolab shall not be liable for any contingent, incidental, or consequentialdamage or expense incurred by you due to partial or complete inoperability of itsproducts for any reason whatsoever or due to any inaccurate informationgenerated by its products. Hydrolab’s obligations and your remedies are limitedas described above.

Products are sold on the basis of specifications applicable at the time of sale.Hydrolab Corporation shall have no obligation to modify or update productsonce sold.

Warranty InformationIf you have any questions concerning this warranty, please call 800-949-3766(valid in the U.S.A. and Canada only) or 512-255-8841.

You may have your instrument repaired at Hydrolab any time it needs service,whether it is in warranty or not. There is a charge for repairs after the warrantyperiod.

Hydrolab instruments are normally repaired and shipped (transportation paid, viaUPS) within 10 working days of receipt at Hydrolab.

How to Obtain Repair Service

1) Contact Hydrolab by telephone, fax, letter, or e-mail.

Hydrolab Corporation12921 Burnet Road, Austin, TX, 78727, USATelephone: 800-949-3766* or 512-255-8841Fax: (512) 255-3106e-mail: [email protected]

2) Should you be advised by Hydrolab to return an item, a returned goodsauthorization number (RGA No.) will be issued. The RGA No. must be

shown on the Service Memorandum, the address label of each shippingcarton, and any correspondence related to the equipment returned for repair.

3) Please carefully pack your equipment in its original shipping case (or otherprotective package) to avoid in-transit damage. Such damage is not coveredby warranty, so we suggest that you insure the shipment. We also recom-mend that the entire instrument, including the battery pack and charger(when applicable), be returned unless a particular faulty component has beenclearly isolated.

4) Send the instrument and a completed Service Memorandum to Hydrolab,using the address shown on the Service Memorandum. For your conve-nience, several copies of the Service Memorandum are included in yourUser’s Manual.

Whether or not the unit is under warranty, it is your responsibility to payshipping charges for delivery to Hydrolab.

* This number is valid in the United States of America and Canada only.














by warranty. Zip ____________________________________________________________________________





this information:

R.G.A. No. ________________




Phone (512) 255-8841 or 800-949-3766 • FAX (512) 255-3106

SERVICE MEMORANDUM






maximum.




_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________
















by warranty. Zip ____________________________________________________________________________





this information:

R.G.A. No. ________________




Phone (512) 255-8841 or 800-949-3766 • FAX (512) 255-3106

SERVICE MEMORANDUM






maximum.




_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________ _____________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________




A2-1APPENDIX 2:TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS SENSOR

1. IntroductionThe sensor is composed of a housing fitted with a connector that interfaces directly to a port inthe bottom cap of a DataSonde 4 or a MiniSonde. The other end of the housing is threaded toaccept a membrane cartridge holding a length of tubing acting as a gas permeable membrane.This sensor will measure the pressure of all dissolved gases in the water sample from 200 to1400 millimeters of mercury (mmHg).

FIG. A1-1: TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS SENSOR (SIDE VIEW)

The membrane cartridge is removable by using the small sensor spanner wrench included inthe maintenance kit.

! CAUTION : The membrane tubing is very thin and fragile. To avoid damag-ing the membrane, do not touch the membrane with the wrenchor any other hard object.

! CAUTION: The maximum immersion depth for this sensor is 30 meters. If themultip robe must be lowered to depths exceeding 30 meters, youmust remove the membrane cartridge and install the protectivecap included with the sensor. In this case, the TDG sensor will notbe usable. Exposing the TDG sensor to depths beyond 30 metersmay cause subtle, undetectable errors in the data readings.

! CAUTION: Do not remove the membrane tubing from the carrier. The sen-sor will not operate correctly if you cut, stretch, puncture, orotherwise damage the fine silicone tubing.

detachable membrane cartridge

sensor body


A2-2

TOTAL DISSOLVED GAS SENSOR

2. Maintenance

What do I need to service the total dissolved gas sensor?

• Dishwasher liquid or a “gentle” detergent• Bleach• 1 small bucket or container• 1 soft bristle brush• 1 pair of plastic tweezers• 1 spanner wrench (provided)• Protective cap

Steps to follow

STEP 1: Dry the entire area around the membrane cartridge and remove the membranecartridge from the sensor body. Position the multiprobe so that the sensor body remaining onthe multiprobe points upward. This will prevent the oil filling from leaking out through themembrane cartridge hole.

STEP 2: Fill the small container with water and add a few drops of the dishwasher liquid.

STEP 3: Immerse the membrane cartridge in the soap water. To remove oil, grease, twigs, orother large deposits, vigorously, but carefully, stir the cartridge in the container.

STEP 4: Remove the cartridge from the soap water. To remove smaller deposits, carefullybut thoroughly brush the surface of the membrane with the soft bristle brush following thegrain of the tubing.

STEP 5: Rinse the membrane cartridge by adding 1/4 cup of bleach into the soap water. Tokill all micro-organisms left on the sensor, immerse and stir the cartridge in the container.Rinse with tap water.

STEP 6: If you are going to calibrate the sensor, do not re-install the cartridge onto the sensorbody. Otherwise, thread the cartridge onto the sensor body. Do not touch the membrane tubingwith your hands when trying to start the threads. Tighten very lightly with the spanner wrench.


A2-3


3. Calibration

Introduction

The TDG sensor requires four factory installed calibration constants. These constants areincluded with the sensor. These constants are unique to each sensor and are stored in themultiprobe memory. The sensor and the multiprobe are a matched pair and should not beinterchanged without changing the sensor constants.

In addition to the sensor constants, a two pressure point user calibration is required. The twopressure points together determine a best fit line to correct the sensor output for offset and gainerrors. Any calibration pressure less than or equal to 800 mmHg will automatically be used toset the first point. You can use the ambient barometric pressure for this point. Any calibrationpressure greater than 800 mmHg will automatically be used to set the second point. You willneed a small manually operated pressure pump to generate pressure for the second calibrationpoint.

What do I need to calibrate the TDG sensor?

• Tubing (e.g. MasterFlex® 6424-16)• An accurate pressure source• 1 towel• 1 spanner wrench (provided)• Calibration tubing adapter

Steps to follow

STEP 1: If not done already, very carefully remove the membrane cartridge from the sensorbody and store in a safe place.

STEP 2: Holding the multiprobe with the attached sensor body in an upright position, andthread the tubing adapter onto the threads on the end of the sensor body. The tubing adapter isa specially machined part that has a barbed tubing fitting on one end and matching femalethreads for the sensor body. Contact Hydrolab for details concerning this adapter.

STEP 3: Attach a few feet of the tubing to the adapter. If you will be using ambient barometricpressure as the first calibration point, leave the other end of the tubing disconnected. Other-wise, connect the free end of the tubing to a pressure source that cannot exceed the maximumsensor rating of 1400 mmHg.

STEP 4: Pressurize the sensor to the first calibration value or obtain the current barometricpressure. From the Main Menu, move the cursor to the Calibrate submenu and press ENTER.


A2-4




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select...


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: Then move the cursor to TDG and press ENTER.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Calibrate:

Temp Oxygen Cond Turbidity Depth100 TDG Ions-1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Next, leave the cursor on TDG:mmHg or move it to TDG:psia and press ENTER. Forour example, we will use the psia units.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Calibrate: TDG:

TDG:mmHg TDG:psia TDG:mV

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Type in the pressure applied in pounds per square inch absolute. If your pressuremeter is a gage unit, you must add the ambient barometric pressure to the value. Press EN-TER. You will see a Calibration completed! or a Calibration failed! message before beingreturned to the Main Menu.


A2-5




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Calibrate: TDG: TDG:psia:

Calibration point (psia): [0.0]«

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 8: Change the pressure to the value you wish to use for the second calibration point (>800 mmHg).

STEP 9: Enter the Calibrate sub-menu again and repeat steps 5 to 7, entering the pressurevalue for the second calibration point. Remember to add the ambient barometric pressure ifyour pressure meter is a gage unit. The asterisk (*) if any should disappear.

STEP 10: Remove the tubing and the calibration adapter and very carefully, install the mem-brane cartridge onto the sensor body. Do not touch the membrane tubing and lightly tightenwith the spanner wrench.

The TDG sensor is now calibrated and ready for use.


A3-1

1234561234561234561234561234512345

12345671234512345

123456

12345123456123456

APPENDIX 3: TURBIDITY

FIGURE A3-1: HYDROLAB TURBIDITY SENSOR* (SIDE VIEWS)

FIG. A3-2: SENSOR END VIEW FIG. A3-3: CONNECTOR END VIEW

1. MaintenanceThe Hydrolab turbidity sensor consists of infrared emitter and a photodiode detector. These compo-nents are mounted in the sensor body. The turbidity sensor uses the nephelometric measurement method.The ranges are 0-100 and 0-1,000 NTU. This method is based on ISO 7027 (International Standard,Second Edition 1990-04-15). The Hydrolab turbidity sensor measures the intensity of light scattered at90˚ from an infrared light source of 880 nm. The display mode produces readings in NTU.

Turbidity sensor maintenance is required when any of the lenses have a visible coating. To evaluate thefrequency of maintenance, monitor the rate and type of fouling and the deployment technique used atyour deployment site.

___________________* Your MiniSonde turbidity sensor will have a longer stem to accommodate the MiniSonde’s sensor configuration.

male pin

femalesocket

lenses

seal insert

probe collaro-rings

1234561234561234561234561234512345

1234567

12345123456

12345123456123456


A3-2

TURBIDITY

What do I need to service the turbidity sensor?

• Deionized water• Methanol• 1 very clean, soft, nonabrasive lint-free cloth• Cotton swabs• 1 small soft-bristle brush

Steps to follow

STEP 1: Rinse your sensor with water directed at the lenses to remove any large cakeddeposits and loose residue. Use the brush to remove any additional residue such as sand or grit.Be careful not to scratch the lenses.

STEP 2: Wet the cloth with methanol. Wipe the lenses.

STEP 3: Rinse the sensor and lenses with deionized water. Repeat.

2. SetupThe turbidity sensor has a couple of setup options that should be set before starting the calibra-tion procedure. You can set the number of data points that are averaged to produce the dis-played reading :

STEP 1: Log-in to security level 3 and from the Main Menu, move the cursor to Setup andpress ENTER.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



A3-3

TURBIDITY



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Then move the cursor to Turbidity and press ENTER.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Setup: Parameters:

Temp Oxygen Cond Turbidity Depth100 * Ions-1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Just press ENTER to select the Turb:NTUs parameter.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Setup: Parameters: Turbidity:

Turb:NTUs

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: You are now asked to enter a number between 1 and 60 to select the number of datapoints used to compute an averaged reading. The data points are measured at roughly one persecond regardless of the display interval you have selected. A large number will produce avery stable reading but will require a long time to show significant changes. A small numberwill produce readings that are not as stable, but will show changes in the data much faster, suchas for profiling work. The current setting is shown in the brackets; just pressing ENTER willaccept this value.


A3-4

TURBIDITY



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Setup: Parameters: Turbidity: Turb:NTUs:

Averaging(1 - 60):[5]«

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Type in your number and press ENTER.

STEP 6: Next you are asked to select an operating range for the turbidity sensor.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Setup: Parameters: Turbidity: Turb:NTUs:

Set Range (1:Auto 2:High 3:Low):[1]«

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The first choice (the default choice) allows the multiprobe to automatically select the mostappropriate range to display turbidity. The multiprobe will dynamically change the resolutionof the displayed data based on the current measurement conditions over 0 - 1000 NTU.

The remaining choices force the multiprobe to display turbidity using a fixed range. If youselect the low range, the readings will indicate an over-ranged condition for values above 100NTU. These choices force the displayed readings to a fixed point or constant resolution for-mat primarily only needed for certain SDI-12 data loggers. Otherwise, it is best to alwaysselect the Auto choice as this gives the best accuracy and performance for the turbidity sensor.



A3-5

TURBIDITY

3. CalibrationCalibration can be performed in a calibration cup or in a stirred vessel. The latter is preferredfor high turbidity standards or time-intensity studies. Prepare the zero and slope standards.The slope standard should be close to the expected NTU value of your deployment site.

What do I need to calibrate for turbidity readings?

• “Turbidity-free” water for the zero calibration. It may be purchased from many supplyhouses or prepared by passing distilled water through a membrane filter with 0.2 µmprecision-sized holes

• Dilutions of formazin or styrene divinylbenzene beads (AMCO-AEPA-1) may be usedfor the slope calibration. The slope standard should be close to the expected NTUvalue of your deployment site

• 1 lint-free cloth• 1 DataSonde 4 calibration cup• 1 beaker (if you select this method for MiniSonde turbidity calibration)• 1 stirred vessel (consisting of a beaker, a stirring bar, and a stirring plate) for the

second calibration option

! WARNING: Formazin is a suspected carcinogen. A material safety data sheethas been included with the formazin contained in your mainte-nance kit. Please read, understand, and follow all safety instruc-tions before using this material.

Formazin may be prepared as per Standard Methods or purchased from many supply houses.The dilution may be performed using standard lab glassware and the following formula:

Standard = NTUSTOCK

* VOLSTOCK

/ (VOLSTOCK

+ VOLTF

) where: NTUSTOCK

is theNTU value of the stock, VOL

STOCK is the volume of stock used, and VOL

TF is the volume of

“turbidity-free” water used.

Note that the final volume of the standard is VOLSTOCK

+ VOLTF

. For example, if you want 500ml of 90 NTU as your slope standard and you are using 4,000 NTU stock, then you would add11.3 ml of stock to 489 ml of turbidity-free water. Generally, good measurement techniquerequires that standards at or near the expected field value be used for slope calibration.

NOTES: Make sure that the standard is well mixed before making the dilution. Failure to do so

can create an inaccurate calibration and eventually ruin the quality of the stock standard. Standard Methods recommends daily preparation of formazin dilutions. Hydrolab has its own calibration standards. Hydrolab turbidity standards will not


A3-6

TURBIDITY

produce the same readings if used with other turbidimeters.

Additional standards may be prepared to check the linearity and inter-ranging of the turbiditysystem. If so, all dilutions should originate from the same stock solution. Notice that the stockformazin solutions have a tolerance of + 5%, which, even with a perfect instrument, couldproduce an apparent 10% error.

Certified AMCO-AEPA-1 is available from Advanced Polymer Systems of Redwood, Califor-nia. Do not dilute API standards.

First calibration option (in the calibration cup*)

Use this calibration method when calibrating turbidity with API standards.

STEP 1: Rinse the sensors and the calibration cup with turbidity-free water several times andthen dry them as much as possible with the lint-free cloth. You can also use compressed air if itis available to you. Any residue or fluids left behind can affect the zero and slope calibrations.

STEP 2: Fill the calibration cup with turbidity-free water. To prevent excess bubbles, slowlypour on the side of the cup. Wait for equilibrium (usually 1 to 2 minutes).




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: First, move the cursor to Turbidity and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:

Temp Cond Depth Oxygen Ions-1 Turbidity

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

___________________* MiniSonde turbidity sensor calibration MUST be done in a vessel with at least a 2 inch clearance between the

vessel wall and the sensor’s face, in a DataSonde 4, or in an earlier generation of multiprobe calibration cup. Dueto the room needed, we do not recommend that turbidity calibration be done in the MiniSonde calibration cup.


A3-7

TURBIDITY

STEP 5: Next, leave the cursor on Turb:NTUs and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Turbidity:

Turb:NTUs

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Then, type 0 and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Turbidity: Turb:NTUs:

Enter turbidity standard (NTUs): 0<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Discard the turbidity-free water and dry the sensors with the lint-free cloth as muchas possible. You can also use compressed air.

STEP 8: Rinse once with the slope calibration standard. Dry the sensors with the lint-freecloth as much as possible.

STEP 9: Fill the calibration cup with the well-mixed slope standard. To prevent excessbubbles, slowly pour on the side of the cup. Wait for equilibrium (usually 1 to 2 minutes).

STEP 10: In the Main Menu, move the cursor with the arrow keys to Calibrate and pressENTER. First, move the cursor to Turbidity and press ENTER.

STEP 11: Next, move the cursor to Turb:NTUs and press ENTER. Then, enter the value ofyour slope standard (e.g. 100 NTUs) and press ENTER. The slope is now set. Discard theslope standard. Rinse the sensors and the calibration cup with deionized water. Repeat.

Checking for linearity

You should check the linearity of your calibration with a known standard, such as 50 NTUs.

STEP 1: Rinse the sensors with turbidity-free water and the dry them as much as possible.You can also use compressed air.

STEP 2: Fill the calibration cup with the 50 NTU standard. Wait for equilibrium.

Your reading should be within ±5 NTU of 50 NTU. If this is not the case, repeat this procedurewith a fresh standard and if the reading is not within the ±5 NTU range, rinse the sensors and


A3-8

TURBIDITY

the calibration cup with deionized water and repeat the calibration procedure. Repeat thelinearity check.

Your turbidity sensor is now calibrated.

Second calibration option (in a stirred vessel)

Use this calibration method when calibrating turbidity with formazin.

STEP 1: Rinse the sensors and the calibration cup with turbidity-free water several times.Dry the sensors with the lint-free cloth as much as possible.

STEP 2: Fill the stirred vessel with turbidity-free water. Invert the multiprobe sensors intothe stirred vessel. Wait for equilibrium.

STEP 3: In the Main Menu, move the cursor with the arrow keys to Calibrate and pressENTER. First, move the cursor to Turbidity and press ENTER. Next, move the cursor toTurb:NTUs and press ENTER. Then, type 0 and press ENTER.

STEP 4: Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the slope standard entering your slope value. Discard the standard and rinse the sensorsand calibration cup with deionized water. Repeat.

Dilutions to track linearity may be performed in a similar manner by adding stock. Allow timefor equilibrium and note the result.

Your turbidity sensor is now calibrated.

4. Troubleshooting turbidityMost problems experienced with turbidity are a result of bubbles or other contaminates inter-fering with the LED or lens. The following is a checklist of things to consider:

• Verify proper maintenance has been performed.

• If you cannot calibrate the zero, ask yourself the following questions:

Is the standard turbidity-free water?Has the sensor been properly cleaned?Did you enter exactly zero for the standard?


A3-9

TURBIDITY

• If you cannot calibrate the slope, ask yourself the following questions:

Were errors made in the dilution calculation/execution?Was stock or dilution allowed to settle before use?Is stock standard correct?Has the sensor been properly cleaned?Was the correct standard value entered?

• Verify the value of the standard being used has been correctly entered.

• Verify the standards used to calibrate are properly prepared and have not been con-taminated. Also, verify standard is well mixed and no settling has occurred. This isespecially important if using high NTU value standards derived from formazin.

• If a ? is displayed adjacent to the turbidity reading there may be to much ambient lightseen by the sensor. Or it may indicate that the sensor LED has failed or degraded.

• The orientation of the weighted sensor guard for the MiniSonde can affect turbidityreadings. A 6% non-linearity can be observed by rotating the guard by only 30 degreesfrom the optimum location. When installing the weighted sensor guard on theMiniSonde, make sure that one of the three “openings” of the guard is centered overthe turbidity sensor lenses’ field of vision. Note that at this position the adjacent webhas just left the turbidity sensor lenses’ field of vision.

For the DataSonde 4, the turbidity sensor is placed with sufficient distance from theother sensors that you do not need to concern yourself with the placement of the weightedsensor guard.

• Temperature is another factor that you need to take into account. To avoid nonrepre-sentative readings, we recommend that you calibrate your turbidity sensor in water atthe same temperature as the water at your deployment site.

• If turbidity values are unstable, you need to check if large particles or bubbles arepresent in the water, or if the sensor is close to other objects in the water.

Try to secure the multiprobe where the turbidity sensor will not “see” other objects.These object include docks, bushes, cables, etc. During operation, water currents cancause the multiprobe to move toward and away from these objects, creating unreliableturbidity results.


A4-1

APPENDIX 4: AMMONIUM

123451234512345123451234512345123451234512345

11111111

121212121212121212

11111111

121212121212121212

1212121212121212

111111111

1212121212121212

111111111


o-rings

HYDROLAB AMMONIUM SENSOR (SIDE VIEW)

SENSOR END VIEW CONNECTOR END VIEW

1. Maintenance

The Hydrolab ammonium sensor is an ion-specific electrode designed to measure the concen-tration of ammonium ions in a solution. Hydrolab software can calculate total ammonia basedon ammonium and pH using an algorithmic equation.

! CAUTION: To avoid inaccurate ammonia readings, closely follow the main-tenance and calibration procedures for pH, reference, conduc-tivity, and temperature.

The ammonium sensor is composed of a replaceable sensor made of a black plastic housing, amembrane, and two o-rings. This replaceable sensor fits on an adapter which plugs into themultiprobe’s ammonium sensor port.

The ammonium ion concentration (NH4+) may be displayed as milligrams per liter as nitrogen(mg/l-N) or as the direct output of the sensor in millivolts (mV). The total ammonia nitrogencontent of water is composed of ammonia gas (NH3) and ammonium ions (NH4+) and can bedisplayed as total NH4 (NH4Tot) in milligrams per liter as nitrogen (mg/l-N).

black sensor body

male pin

femalesocket

replaceable sensor


A4-2

AMMONIUM

The Hydrolab ammonium sensor requires maintenance when coated with oil, sediment, orbiological growth.

! WARNING: To avoid damaging the ammonium membrane, place the ammo-nium hydration cap over the sensor when using soaps, detergents,or any active solvents such as methanol, alcohol, or acetone toclean the other sensors. Use caution.

What do I need to service the ammonium sensor?

• Hydrolab’s MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit• Deionized water• 3% hydrogen peroxide solution• Cotton swabs

Steps to follow

STEP 1: Damp a cotton swab with the 3% hydrogen peroxide solution.

STEP 2: Thoroughly clean the tip and body of the ammonium sensor with the cotton swab.

STEP 3: Rinse the sensor with deionized water. Repeat.

Ammonia is calculated from ammonium based on the pH and temperature interdependence ofammonium and ammonia. To insure accurate ammonia readings, it is necessary that your pH,reference, temperature, and conductivity systems be properly maintained and calibrated.

2. CalibrationAmmonium calibration is a two-, three-, or four-point calibration. You can select the calibra-tion option that will best suit the needs of your deployment site. If you selected the four-pointcalibration, for example, ammonium is not calibrated until all four points are calibrated.

To prepare your instrument for ammonium calibration, you need to add the ammonium outputin millivolts (mV) and in milligrams per liter as Nitrogen (mg/l-N) to your display. In the MainMenu, move the cursor with the arrow keys to Setup and press ENTER. First, move the cursorto Display and press ENTER. Then, move the cursor to Ions-1 and press ENTER. Next,move the cursor to NH4+:mV and press ENTER. Repeat the procedure for NH4+:mg/l-N.


A4-3

AMMONIUM

What do I need to calibrate for ammonium readings?

• Hydrolab’s NH4 calibration standards (Low: ref. No. 002587; High: ref. No. 002588)• Deionized water• 1 lint-free cloth• 1 ammonium sensor hydration cap• 1 calibration cup

Choosing your calibration points

Before starting the calibration procedure, you need to choose the number of points you wish tocalibrate. To do so, follow the next steps.

STEP 1: From the Main Menu screen, move the cursor to Setup and press ENTER.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Then, move the cursor to Ions-1 and press ENTER.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A4-4

AMMONIUM

STEP 4: From the list of parameters, move the cursor to NH4+:mg/l-N and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Ions-1:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Ions-1: NH4+:mg/l-N:

Cal pts (2,3,4): <<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 5: You are now prompted a number - 2, 3, or 4 - which will determine the number ofpoints to calibrate (2-, 3-, or 4-point calibration) that you will follow next. Type the desirednumber and press ENTER.


Cal pts (2,3,4): 4<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Your setup has been entered, and you will be returned to the Main Menu.


Setup completed!

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Now you are ready for sensor calibration. Make sure that you calibrate all points according tothe number you specified when choosing the number of calibration points above.

Two-point calibration

This first calibration option is suitable for laboratory bench work or field work. The tempera-ture should not change more than 1 ˚C from the original calibration temperature. Two calibra-tion solutions will be used to represent a high and low ammonium concentration.


A4-5

AMMONIUM

STEP 1: Let the calibration solutions reach room temperature. Ideally, we recommend thatthe temperature of both solutions be at the expected field operation temperature. For accuratecalibration, the temperature of both solutions should be within 0.2 ˚C.

STEP 2: Place the calibration cup on the sensor end of the multiprobe. Pour a small amount(approximately 1/4 of an inch) of the Hydrolab low concentration ammonium standard in thecup. Place the calibration cap over the cup and shake vigorously. Discard the solution.

STEP 3: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface, with the sensors facing up. Fill thecalibration cup with the Hydrolab low concentration ammonium standard to a point just abovethe D.O. cell, covering the ammonium sensor. A typical reading is -70 mV.

If after five minutes, the mV value is unstable, drifting, or more than 100 mV from the ex-pected value, follow these troubleshooting procedures:

1. The ammonium sensor and reference electrode have not thermally equilibrated. Let all yourmultiprobe components reach room or field temperature and repeat the two-point calibration.

2. The ammonium membrane has not completed hydration. Rinse the sensor with deionizedwater. Repeat.

3. Fill the ammonium sensor hydration cap with the Hydrolab high concentration ammoniumstandard. With the sensors pointing to the floor, place the cap over the ammonium sensor.Push the cap half way over the sensor. With the sensors pointing to the ceiling, secure yourmultiprobe to the work surface. Push the cap all the way down. Wait for several hours andrepeat STEPS 1 through 3 above.

If your sensor does not respond after following the above-listed troubleshooting tips, you mayneed to replace the sensor (see “Ammonium sensor replacement” later in this chapter).

Otherwise, let’s proceed with the calibration procedure:

STEP 4: Once the solution has stabilized, move your cursor to Calibrate and press ENTER.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A4-6

AMMONIUM


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:

Temp Cond Depth Oxygen Ions-1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Then, move to NH4+:mg/l-N and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Since we have chosen to use the low concentration standard, type in a 2 and pressENTER to select the low concentration, room temperature point. You can also press ENTERto accept the number between brackets [1.0].

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1: NH4+:mg/l-N:

1: Hi-Room 2: Lo-Room: [1.0]2<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 8: You are now prompted to enter the standard. This number must represent the activityof your calibration solution - not its concentration - and it can be found on the label of yourHydrolab solution.


Standard: [4.613] 4.613<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The next message should appear on your screen:


Calibration completed!

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A4-7

AMMONIUM

If this is not the case, start the calibration process over. You might want to check the trouble-shooting section at the end of this chapter.

Now, discard the low concentration standard and let’s move to the second point of this calibra-tion procedure.

STEP 9: Pour a small amount (approximately 1/4 of an inch) of the Hydrolab high concentra-tion ammonium standard in the calibration cup. Place the calibration cap over the cup andshake vigorously. Discard the solution.

STEP 10: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface. Fill the calibration cup with theHydrolab high concentration ammonium standard to a point just above the D.O. cell, coveringthe ammonium sensor. The readings should be approximately 50-60 mV more positive thanthe low concentration calibration mV reading.

STEP 11: Repeat Steps 4 to 6 above.

STEP 12: Since we have chosen to use the high concentration standard, type a 1 and pressENTER to select the high concentration, room temperature point.


1: Hi-Room 2: Lo-Room: [2.0]1<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 13: You are now prompted to enter the standard. This number must represent theactivity of your calibration solution - not its concentration - and it can be found on the label ofyour Hydrolab solution.


Standard: [46.13] 46.13<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Your ammonium sensor is now calibrated.

If after five minutes, the difference between the two calibration points is greater than 0.2 ˚C,we recommend that you recalibrate one or both of the points with temperatures within ±0.2 ˚Cof each other.

You should also check for the following signs: ? @ N after your ammonium reading. Referto the “Troubleshooting” section at the end of this chapter, if these signs are displayed.


A4-8

AMMONIUM

Three-point calibration

Repeat steps 1 through 13 of the “Two-point calibration” option. Make sure that you haveconfigured the NH4+:mg/l-N parameter for 3 calibration points. See “Choosing your calibra-tion points” at the beginning of this chapter for details.

The next steps are used to determine the isopotential point which is required to temperature-compensate the ammonium and ammonia outputs. Follow these steps to calibrate the thirdpoint:

STEP 1: Cool your multiprobe and the high concentration solution down from 10 to 15 ˚Clower than your original room temperature calibration points.

STEP 2: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface. Fill the calibration cup with the Hydro-lab high concentration solution.

STEP 3: Once your instrument and solution have reached the required temperature, type a 3and press ENTER to select the high concentration, low temperature point.


1: Hi-Room 2: Lo-Room 3: Hi-Lo: [1.0]3<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Standard: [46.13] 46.13<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Note the mV value and the temperature of this calibration point.

The mV values for cold standards are usually within 30 mV of their room temperature values.


A4-9

AMMONIUM

Four-point calibration

Repeat steps 1 through 13 of the “Two-point calibration” option and steps 1 through 4 of the“Three-point calibration” option. Make sure that you have configured the NH4+:mg/l-N pa-rameter for 4 calibration points. See “Choosing your calibration points” at the beginning ofthis chapter for details.

The next steps are used to refine the isopotential point for this sensor. Follow these steps tocalibrate the fourth point:

STEP 1: Pour a small amount (approximately 1/4 of an inch) of the Hydrolab low concentra-tion ammonium standard in the calibration cup. Place the calibration cap over the cup andshake vigorously. Discard the solution.

STEP 2: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface. Fill the calibration cup with the Hydro-lab low concentration solution.

STEP 3: Let the multiprobe, filled with the low concentration solution, cool down to ±0.2 ˚Cof the high concentration at low temperature calibration point. The readings should remainapproximately 55 mV lower than the reading displayed for the high concentration at low tem-perature calibration.

STEP 4: Once your instrument and solution have reached the required temperature, type a 4and press ENTER to select the low concentration, low temperature point.


1: Hi-Room 2: Lo-Room 3: Hi-Lo 4: Lo-Lo: [3.0]4<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Standard: [4.613] 4.613<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


If after five minutes, the difference between the two low temperature calibration points isgreater than 0.2 C, we recommend that you recalibrate one or both of the points with tempera-tures within ±0.2 ˚C of each other.


A4-10

AMMONIUM

3. Ammonium sensor replacementWhen calibration cannot be completed, the sensor needs to be replaced. To replace the sensor,you need to order the “Ammonium sensor replacement kit” (Ref. No. 01082) from Hydrolab.This kit includes a new ammonium sensor, new o-rings, and an installation wrench.

STEP 1: Rinse the sensors with tap water and dry the ammonium sensor and adapter.

STEP 2: Remove the ammonium sensor from its adapter with the installation wrench.

STEP 3: Install the o-rings on the new sensor. Insert the new sensor on the adapter andtighten until snug. To avoid breaking the sensor, do not overtighten.

STEP 4: Remove the hydration cap from the new ammonium sensor.

Proceed with the calibration steps. If the readings are still overranging, follow the hydrationprocedure described under the ammonium sensor storage section below.

4. StorageTo operate properly, the ammonium sensor requires hydration. During use, the sensor shouldremain in contact with water as much as possible. Should the sensor dry out, a rehydrationperiod of 24 hours is necessary for the sensor to stabilize.

Short-term storage

STEP 1: Fill the ammonium sensor hydration cap with the Hydrolab high concentrationammonium standard.

STEP 2: With the sensors pointing to the floor, place the cap over the ammonium sensor.Push the cap half way over the sensor.

STEP 3: With the sensors pointing to the ceiling, secure your multiprobe to the work surface.Push the hydration cap all the way down.

Long-term storage

Should you decide to store your multiprobe for an extended period of time, be aware that longexposure of the sensor to water or even to the hydration solution will leach out the activeingredients from the sensor. Apply the following procedure to maximize your sensor’s life.


A4-11

AMMONIUM

STEP 1: Thoroughly dry the ammonium sensor and the hydration cap with the lint-free cloth.

STEP 2: Place the cap over the ammonium sensor.

! CAUTION: When redeploying the sensor, a rehydration period of 24 hoursis necessary for the sensor to stabilize and be fully operational.

5. Troubleshooting

This section was designed to assist you with questions you might have about solving some ofthe common ammonium sensor problems.

If you need to clean your sensors with methanol to remove grease and other deposits, place theammonium hydration cap over the ammonium sensor to protect it from methanol and othersolvents. Clean all sensors with methanol. Rinse them with deionized water. Repeat. Removethe hydration cap before calibrating ammonium.

If you are not getting any readings from your ammonium sensor, verify if you have removed allstorage, protection, or hydration caps. These caps will corrupt or prevent readings.

If the ? sign appears after your ammonium reading, it means that you have a questionable orcompromised reading and should use fresh standard for calibration or start the calibration pro-cess over. You need to keep in mind that ammonium requires multiple calibration points. Youcould get questionable readings until all points are calibrated.

If the @ sign appears after your ammonium reading, it means that your pH and /or your con-ductivity sensors have not been installed. You need to install these sensors.

If N/A appears in place of your ammonium reading, it means that the sensor has not beeninstalled. You need to check your multiprobe and install the sensor.

Make sure that you have installed an ammonium sensor in the correct optional sensor expan-sion port of the sensor end of the multiprobe and not a sensor for another type of ion, such aschloride or nitrate.


A4-12

AMMONIUM

6. Technical Hints

What is ammonium?

Ammonium, NH4+, is an ionized form of nitrogen. There are many naturally-occurring forms

of nitrogen, including the nitrogen gas that comprises nearly 80% of the atmosphere. Nitrogencompounds dissolved in water are usually classified as organic or inorganic. Soluble inorganicnitrogen compounds include ammonia, nitrite, and nitrate. Nitrate is related to ammonia in thatnitrifying bacteria convert ammonia to nitrate, which is less toxic to animal life.

Ammonia has two forms - the ammonium ion, and un-ionized, dissolved ammonia gas (NH3).

The form depends on pH, with ammonium predominating when the pH is below 8.75, andammonia predominating above pH 9.75. The forms are freely interconverted during a changein pH. Total ammonia is the sum of ammonium and ammonia concentrations.

How is ammonium measured?

Ammonium ion concentration is measured with a number of wet-chemistry or instrumentalmethods.

Ammonium ion concentration is also measured with an ammonium ion-selective electrode(ISE). Inside the ammonium ISE is a reference electrode immersed in a solution of fixedammonium ion concentration. This solution is separated from the sample by a polymer mem-brane containing a chemical compound that reacts, selectively, with ammonium ions. Ammo-nium ions on each side of the membrane equilibrate with the reactive compound at the innerand outer membrane surfaces. A result of the partitioning into the membrane surface of theammonium ions from the internal solution and the ammonium ions from the sample is a mea-surable electrical potential that varies with the concentration of ammonium ions in the sample.This potential is measured with an external reference electrode (which is not the same refer-ence electrode immersed in the sealed solution), and then scaled to ammonium ion concentra-tion (provided the ISE has been calibrated with ammonium ion calibration solutions).

Because the relationship between ammonium ion concentration and dissolved ammonia gasconcentration is controlled by pH, total ammonia can be calculated if the ammonium ion con-centration and the pH of the water are known. However, if the pH of the sample is above 10,most of the total ammonia is in the form of dissolved ammonia gas (which is not measured bythe ammonium sensor). Accurate measurements become difficult as the ammonium ion formbecomes very small compared to total ammonia.

Notice that ISEs are sensitive only to the ionized form of the chemical in question. Un-ionizedforms of the chemical (for instance, insoluble salts or organic compounds), will not be detectedby the ISE.


A4-13

AMMONIUM

How is ammonium measurement useful in water qualitymonitoring applications?

Nitrogen is an essential nutrient for all forms of life, including all levels of aquatic organisms.Biologically-available nitrogen is found in both suspended solids and dissolved compounds innatural waters. Many natural waters are nitrogen-limited, meaning that nitrogen compoundsare the limiting nutrients. Thus even small changes in biologically-available nitrogen levelscan dramatically effect the levels of microbiological, plant, and eventually, animal life. Highlevels of accessible nitrogen, of which total ammonia is one form, can lead to an over abun-dance of microorganisms, a situation which often results in mortality to higher organisms (suchas fish and shrimp) because of depleted dissolved oxygen.

Excessive total ammonia can also result in mortality to the higher organisms, especially whenhigh pH levels favor dissolved ammonia gas, which is more toxic than the ammonium form.

Applications of ammonium ion measurement include tracing the movement of point- or non-point source pollutants (for instance, runoff from agricultural operations), monitoring aquacul-ture projects for excessive waste concentrations, and surveying nutrient levels in natural waterbodies.

How is ammonium measurement implemented in Hydro-lab instruments?

Hydrolab uses the ammonium ISE, and the same external reference electrode used for pHmeasurement, for ammonium measurement. Because the electrical response of the ammoniumISE changes with temperature, ammonium readings are corrected automatically for tempera-ture effects. However, the temperature response can vary between ammonium sensors - socalibration at a second temperature is needed if the temperature of the sample will be differentfrom that of the calibration standards. Three- or four-point calibrations are recommended: twodifferent standards at room temperature, and at least one standard at a temperature close to thatexpected of the samples.

The ammonium ISE response also changes with the ionic strength of the sample, since theammonium ion appears less “active” when surrounded by other ions. Hydrolab corrects forionic strength by measuring the conductivity of the sample water, calculating the approximateionic strength of the water (assuming “typical” river water ionic composition) and then adjust-ing the ammonium reading for any difference between the ionic strengths of the calibrationstandards and the sample.

For example, suppose you calibrate your ammonium ISE with a solution whose ammoniumconcentration is 5 mg/l-N, and whose conductivity (an approximation of ionic strength) is 100µmhos. Suppose then that you made a measurement in a sample whose ammonium concentra-tion was also 5 mg/l-N, but whose conductivity was 1000 µmhos. The higher ionic strength ofthe sample would cause the ammonium ion to appear less active, meaning the ammonium ISE


A4-14

AMMONIUM

reading would be approximately 0.4 mg/l-N lower than the calibration standard – even thoughthe true concentrations are both 5 mg/l-N. The Hydrolab system largely prevents this error bymeasuring conductivity, calculating an approximate ionic strength, and then correcting the ISEreading.

As a result of Hydrolab’s ionic strength correction, the ammonium activity, rather than theammonium concentration, of the standard is used for calibration. Hydrolab supplies calibra-tion standards labeled with ammonium activity, rather than concentration. For instance, a de-ionized water solution that is:

0.00357 ± 0.00001 molar in ammonium chloride,0.000477 ± 0.000004 molar in magnesium acetate,0.000954 ± 0.000004 molar in acetic acid, with0.055% glutaraldehyde preservative added,

has an ammonium concentration of 50 mg/l-N, but an ammonium activity of just 46.2 mg/l-N.For a lower ammonium concentration, Hydrolab supplies a solution that is:

0.000357 ± 0.000001 molar in ammonium chloride,0.001548 ± 0.00001 molar in magnesium acetate,0.003095 ± 0.00001 molar in acetic acid, with0.055% glutaraldehyde preservative added,

resulting in a 5 mg/l-N ammonium concentration, and a 4.62 mg/l-N activity.

The ammonium sensor has a measurement range of 0.1 - 50 mg/l-N (mg/l-N means mg/l ofnitrogen, present, in this case, in the ammonium form), with a 90% response in less than oneminute, at depths to 200 meters.Leaching of chemicals from the membrane, coating of the membrane with surfactants or bio-logical growth, or damage to the membrane can lead to a decreased sensitivity of the sensor.Eventually, the sensor will no longer calibrate or operate properly. The lifetime of the sensordepends greatly on deployment conditions. The ammonium sensor will last longer in cleanwaters than in severely contaminated waters.

All ammonium ISEs suffer interferences from other ions, especially sodium and potassium.Even though the sensor is most selective to ammonium, other ions, when found in high concen-trations, can dominate the sensor response. For example, concentrations of 23 mg/l of potas-sium ion, 821 mg/l of sodium ion, or 4,340 mg/l of magnesium ion all “look like” about 1 mg/l-N of ammonium ion to an ammonium ISE. Significant interferences are not likely to beencountered in water with conductivity below 1,000 µS, but in sea water, which contains over10,000 mg/l of sodium ion, an ammonium sensor would read over 12 mg/l-N for ammoniumconcentration, even in the absence of ammonium, because of the sodium interference.

Because of the sodium ion interference, the ammonium sensor performs poorly in salt water.


A4-15

AMMONIUM

Benefits of using Hydrolab ammonium sensor

Hydrolab ammonium measurement provides these benefits:

• “ruggedized” sensor operating to depths of 200 meters;

• range of 0.1 - 50 mg/l-N ammonium;

• automatic calculation of ammonia and total ammonia concentrations;

• field-serviceable reference electrode;

• automatic correction for temperature;

• superior automatic compensation for ionic strength effects;

• application advice from Hydrolab’s excellent customer support team.


A5-1

APPENDIX 5: CHLORIDE

123451234512345123451234512345123451234512345

11111111

121212121212121212

11111111

121212121212121212

1212121212121212

111111111

1212121212121212

111111111


o-rings

HYDROLAB CHLORIDE SENSOR (SIDE VIEW)


1. Maintenance

The Hydrolab chloride sensor is an ion-specific electrode designed to measure the concentra-tion of chloride ions in a solution.

! CAUTION: To avoid inaccurate chloride readings, closely follow themaintenance and calibration procedures for pH reference,conductivity, and temperature.

The chloride sensor is composed of a replaceable sensor made of a green plastic housing, asilver chloride pellet, and two o-rings. This replaceable sensor fits on a green adapter whichplugs into the multiprobe’s chloride sensor port.

The chloride ion concentration (Cl-) may be displayed as milligrams per liter (mg/l) or as thedirect output of the sensor in millivolts (mV).

The Hydrolab chloride sensor requires maintenance when coated with oil, sediment, or biologi-cal growth, or when the sensor fails to calibrate properly. If the sensor response time becomes

green sensor body

male pin

femalesocket

replaceable sensor


A5-2

CHLORIDE

slow (more than 5 minutes to stabilize) or if the sensor will not calibrate (the sensitivity is toolow), polishing the surface until it has a shiny mirror finish will usually rejuvenate the sensor.Often, a failing sensor can completely be rejuvenated via polishing.

What do I need to service the chloride sensor?

• Hydrolab’s MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit• Deionized water• 50% alcohol solution• Cotton swabs

Steps to follow

STEP 1: Damp a cotton swab with the 50% alcohol solution.

STEP 2: Thoroughly clean the tip and body of the chloride sensor with the cotton swab.

STEP 3: Rinse the sensor with deionized water. Repeat STEPS 1-3.

STEP 4: If the surface of the sensor looks dull or if the sensor exhibits insufficient sensitivityto calibrate properly, the surface of the sensor may need to be polished using the polishing kitprovided (Ref. No. 004194). Place a small amount of the alumina powder on the felt pad, andwet it with a few drops of water to form a damp paste.

STEP 5: Press the tip of the chloride sensor firmly against the pad and polish it for 1-5minutes, moving it in a circular motion.

STEP 6: Rinse the alumina paste off of the sensor and thoroughly clean the tip and body witha cotton swab. You will also need to recalibrate your sensor.

The chloride concentration is corrected for changes in the sample temperature and conductiv-ity. To insure accurate chloride readings, it is necessary that your pH reference, temperature,and conductivity systems be properly maintained and calibrated.

2. CalibrationChloride calibration is a two-, three-, or four-point calibration. You can select the calibrationoption that will best suit the needs of your deployment site. If you selected the four-pointcalibration, for example, chloride is not calibrated until all four points are calibrated.

To prepare your instrument for chloride calibration, you need to add the chloride output inmillivolts (mV) and in milligrams per liter (mg/l) to your display. In the Main Menu, move the


A5-3

CHLORIDE

cursor with the arrow keys to Setup and press ENTER. First, move the cursor to Display andpress ENTER. Then, move the cursor to Ions-2 and press ENTER. Next, move the cursor toCl-:mV and press ENTER. Repeat the procedure for Cl-:mg/l.

What do I need to calibrate for chloride readings?

• Hydrolab’s calibration solutions (46.2 mg/l, ref. No. 013830; 319 mg/l, ref. No. 013620)• Deionized water• 50% alcohol solution• 1 lint-free cloth• 1 chloride sensor hydration cap• 1 calibration cup

NOTES: To calibrate at higher chloride concentrations, you need to prepare or purchase addi-

tional standards and determine the conductivity-corrected activity of each standard(see table below).

Calibration below 25 mg/l chloride is not recommended. Chloride rapidly leaks fromthe reference electrode and contaminates the standard. If you wish to calibrate below25 mg/l chloride, please call Hydrolab Technical Support at 800-949-3766 (in the UnitedStates of America and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.

TABLE A5-1: EQUIVALENT CHLORIDE ACTIVITIES OFVARIOUS HYDROLAB CONDUCTIVITY STANDARDS

* These conductivity calibration standards are commonly available from Hydrolab and other sources (but MUSTbe made of the same salts to use these Activities). Values are in mg/l Cl-. For calibration standard information andordering, please call us at 800-949-3766 (in the United States of America and Canada only) or (512) 255-8841.

ytivitcudnoC(dradnats µS)

tlaSytivitcA

)-lCl/gm(retawhserFtnelaviuqe

lautcAnoitartnecnoc

001 lCaN 7.72 7.82 6.82

005 lCaN 4.531 7.541 6.541

314,1 lCK 3.913 7.163 5.453

658,21 lCK 927,2 396,3 635,3

006,74 lCaN 014,21 910,81 200,81

µ


A5-4

CHLORIDE



NOTE: If the sample temperature changes more than 1 ˚C from the original calibration tempera-

ture, at least a three-point calibration is recommended, and a four-point calibration is best.




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: From the list of parameters, move the cursor to Cl-:mg/l and press ENTER.


Cl-:mV Cl-:mg/l

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A5-5

CHLORIDE


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Ions-2: Cl-:mg/l:

Cal pts (2,3,4): <<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Cal pts (2,3,4): 4<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Setup completed!

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


NOTES: The circulator MUST BE ON when calibrating the Chloride sensor, since Chloride

(KCl) slowly leaks out of the reference electrode and can interfere by drifting in frontor the chloride sensor.

To minimize contamination, do not reuse the solution.


A5-6

CHLORIDE


This first calibration option is suitable for laboratory bench work or field work. The tempera-ture should not change more than 1 ˚C from the original calibration temperature. Two calibra-tion solutions will be used to represent a both calibration concentrations.


STEP 2: Place the calibration cup on the sensor end of the multiprobe. Pour a small amount(approximately 1/4 of an inch) of the Hydrolab 46.2 mg/l chloride standard in the cup. Placethe calibration cap over the cup and shake vigorously. Discard the solution.

STEP 3: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface, with the sensors facing up. Fill thecalibration cup with the Hydrolab 46.2 mg/l chloride standard to a point just above the D.O. cell,covering the chloride sensor. Turn on the circulator. A value near 225 mV is usually observed.If after five minutes, the mV value is unstable, drifting, or more than 100 mV from the ex-pected value, follow these troubleshooting procedures:

1. The chloride sensor and reference electrode may have not thermally equilibrated. Let allyour multiprobe components reach room or field temperature and repeat the two-point calibra-tion.

2. The silver chloride pellet has not completed hydration. Soak the sensor in tap water or lowstandard for 10-60 minutes, and repeat calibration.

If your sensor does not respond after following the above-listed troubleshooting tips, you mayneed to polish the sensor (see the maintenance section at the beginning of this chapter).





_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A5-7

CHLORIDE


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Then, move to Cl-:mg/l and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-2:

Cl-:mV Cl-:mg/l

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Type in a 2 and press ENTER to select the low concentration (46.2 mg/l chloridestandard), room temperature point. You can also press ENTER to accept the number betweenbrackets [1.0].

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-2: Cl-:mg/l:

1: Hi-Room 2: Lo-Room: [1.0]2<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Standard: [46.2] 46.2<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A5-8

CHLORIDE


Now, turn off the circulator and discard the 46.2 mg/l chloride standard and let’s move to thesecond point of this calibration procedure.

STEP 9: Pour a small amount (approximately 1/4 of an inch) of the Hydrolab 319 mg/lchloride standard (or your “high” chloride standard) in the calibration cup. Place the calibra-tion cap over the cup and shake vigorously. Discard the solution.

STEP 10: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface. Fill the calibration cup with theHydrolab 319 mg/l chloride standard to a point just above the D.O. cell, covering the chloridesensor. Turn on the circulator. The readings should be approximately 50-60 mV more negativethan the 46.2 chloride calibration mV reading.

STEP 11: Form the Main Menu screen, go to Calibrate:Ions2:Cl-:mg/l.

STEP 12: Type a 1 and press ENTER to select Hi-Room.


1: Hi-Room 2: Lo-Room: [2.0]1<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 13: You are now prompted to enter the standard. This number must represent theactivity of the calibration solution you chose - not its concentration - and it can be found on thelabel of your Hydrolab solution. We selected the 319 mg/l solution. You can now turn off yourcirculator.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-2: Cl-:mg/l::

Standard: [46.2] 319<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Your chloride sensor is now calibrated.


You should also check for the following signs: ? @ N after your chloride reading. Refer tothe “Troubleshooting” section at the end of this chapter, if these signs are displayed.


A5-9

CHLORIDE


Repeat steps 1 through 13 of the “Two-point calibration” option. Make sure that you haveconfigured the Cl-:mg/l parameter for 3 calibration points. See “Choosing your calibrationpoints” at the beginning of this chapter for details.

The next steps are used to determine the isopotential point which is required to temperature-compensate the chloride outputs. Follow these steps to calibrate the third point:

STEP 1: Pour cold 319 mg/l chloride solution (our “high” solution for this example) in thecalibration cup (from 10 to 15 C lower than your original room temperature calibration points).

STEP 2: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface. Fill the calibration cup with the Hydro-lab 319 mg/l chloride solution. Turn on the circulator.

STEP 3: Once your instrument and solution have reached a relatively stable temperature, typea 3 and press ENTER to select the 319 mg/l chloride solution, low temperature point.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Standard: [319] 319<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Note the mV value and the temperature of this calibration point.

The mV values for cold standards are usually within 30 mV of their room temperature values.Turn off the circulator.


Repeat steps 1 through 13 of the “Two-point calibration” option and steps 1 through 4 of the“Three-point calibration” option. Make sure that you have configured the Cl-:mg/l parameterfor 4 calibration points. See “Choosing your calibration points” at the beginning of this chap-ter for details.


A5-10

CHLORIDE


STEP 1: Pour a small amount (approximately 1/4 of an inch) of the Hydrolab 46.2 mg/lchloride standard in the calibration cup. Place the calibration cap over the cup and shakevigorously. Discard the solution.

STEP 2: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface. Fill the calibration cup with the Hydro-lab 46.2 mg/l chloride solution. Turn on the circulator.

STEP 3: Let the multiprobe, filled with the 46.2 mg/l chloride solution, cool down to ±0.2 ˚Cof the 319 mg/l solution at low temperature calibration point. The readings should remainapproximately 55 mV higher than the reading displayed for the 319 mg/l solution at low tem-perature calibration.

STEP 4: Once your instrument and solution have reached the required temperature, type a 4and press ENTER to select the 46.2 mg/l solution, low temperature point.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Standard: [319] 46.2<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________




A5-11

CHLORIDE

3. Chloride sensor replacementWhen calibration cannot be completed, the sensor needs to be replaced. To replace the sensor,you need to order the “Chloride sensor replacement kit” (Ref. No. 004195) from Hydrolab.This kit includes a new chloride sensor, new o-rings, a polishing kit, and an installation wrench.

STEP 1: Rinse the sensors with tap water and dry the chloride sensor and adapter.

STEP 2: Remove the chloride sensor from its adapter with the installation wrench.

STEP 3: Install the o-rings on the new sensor. Make sure that the connection is dry. Insertthe new sensor on the adapter and tighten until snug. To avoid breaking the sensor, do notovertighten.

STEP 4: Remove the hydration cap from the new chloride sensor.

Proceed with the calibration steps. If the readings are still overranging, follow the hydrationprocedure described under the chloride sensor storage section below.

4. StorageTo operate properly, the chloride sensor requires hydration. During use, the sensor shouldremain in contact with water as much as possible. Should the sensor dry out, a rehydrationperiod of approximately one hour is necessary for the sensor to stabilize.

Short-term storage

STEP 1: Fill the chloride sensor hydration cap with tap water or low standard.

STEP 2: With the sensors pointing to the floor, place the cap over the chloride sensor. Pushthe cap half way over the sensor.


Long-term storage

Should you decide to store your multiprobe for an extended period of time, be aware that longexposure of the sensor to water will slowly dissolve the silver chloride pellet. Apply the fol-lowing procedure to maximize your sensor’s life.


A5-12

CHLORIDE

STEP 1: Thoroughly dry the chloride sensor and the hydration cap with the lint-free cloth.

STEP 2: Place the cap over the chloride sensor.

! CAUTION: When redeploying the sensor, a rehydration period of at least1 hour is necessary for the sensor to stabilize and be fully op-erational.

5. Troubleshooting

This section was designed to assist you with questions you might have about solving some ofthe common chloride sensor problems.

If you are not getting any readings from your chloride sensor, verify if you have removed allstorage, protection, or hydration caps. These caps will corrupt or prevent readings.

If the ? sign appears after your chloride reading, it means that you have a questionable orcompromised reading and should use fresh standard for calibration or start the calibration pro-cess over. You need to keep in mind that chloride requires multiple calibration points. Youcould get questionable readings until all points are calibrated.

If the @ sign appears after your chloride reading, it means that your conductivity sensor hasnot been installed. You need to install this sensor.

If N/A appears in place of your chloride reading, it means that the sensor has not been installed.You need to check your multiprobe and install the sensor.

Make sure that you have installed a chloride sensor in the correct optional sensor expansionport of the sensor end of the multiprobe and not a sensor for another type of ion, such asammonium or nitrate.

6. Technical Hints

What is chloride?

Chloride, Cl-, is an ionized form of chlorine. Because most chloride salts are ubiquitous and


A5-13

CHLORIDE

highly soluble, chloride is one of the most common ions found in natural waters, and is theprevalent ion in sea water. Though not considered a nutrient, chloride is abundant in all livingcells.

How is chloride measured?

Chloride ion concentration is measured with a number of traditional, wet-chemistry methods(titrations), instrumentally (colorimeters), or by correlation with electrical conductivity mea-surements.

Chloride ion concentration is also measured with a chloride ion-selective electrode (ISE). Thechloride ISE is a pellet of silver chloride in direct contact with the sample water. Becausesilver chloride has extremely low solubility in water, the silver chloride pellet never reacheschemical equilibrium with the sample water. Instead, a small amount of chloride ion dissolvesinto the sample. The resulting relative surplus of silver ions at the surface of the pellet createsa measurable electrical potential that varies with the concentration of chloride ions in the sample.This potential is measured with an external reference electrode, and then scaled to chloride ionconcentration (provided the ISE has been calibrated with chloride ion calibration solutions).


How is chloride measurement useful in water quality moni-toring applications?

The chloride ion does not react with, or adsorb to, most components of rocks and soils, and sois easily transported through water columns. Thus chloride is an effective tracer for pollutionfrom chemicals moving from man-made sources into natural water bodies, or for salt waterintrusion.

Applications of chloride ion measurement include monitoring landfills for leaks, tracing themovement of point- or non-point source pollutants (for instance, storm water runoff) within anatural water body, monitoring estuarine waters for changes in salinity, and detection of saltwater intrusion into drinking water supplies (ground or surface waters).

How is chloride measurement implemented in Hydrolab instruments?

Hydrolab uses the chloride ISE, and the same external reference electrode used for pH mea-surement, for chloride measurement. Because the electrical response of the chloride ISE changeswith temperature, chloride readings are corrected automatically for temperature effects. How-ever, the temperature response can vary between chloride sensors - so calibration at a secondtemperature is needed if the temperature of the sample will be different from that of the calibra-tion standards. Three- or four-point calibrations are recommended: two different standards at


A5-14

CHLORIDE

room temperature, and at least one standard at a temperature close to that expected of thesamples.

The chloride ISE response also changes with the ionic strength of the sample, since the chlo-ride ion appears less “active” when surrounded by other ions. Hydrolab corrects for ionicstrength by measuring the conductivity of the sample water, calculating the approximate ionicstrength of the water (assuming “typical” river water ionic composition at low conductivities,or sea water ionic composition at high conductivities), and then adjusting the chloride readingfor any difference between the ionic strengths of the calibration standards and the sample.

For example, suppose you calibrate your chloride ISE with a solution whose chloride concen-tration is 46 mg/l, and whose conductivity (an approximation of ionic strength) is 500 µmhos.Suppose then that you made a measurement in a sample whose chloride concentration was also46 mg/l, but whose conductivity was 5,000 µmhos (due to presence of other ions). The higherionic strength of the sample would cause the chloride ion to appear less active, meaning thechloride ISE reading would be below 40 mg/l - even though the true concentration is 46 mg/l.The Hydrolab system largely prevents this error by measuring conductivity, calculating anapproximate ionic strength, and then correcting the ISE reading.

As a result of Hydrolab’s ionic strength correction, the chloride activity, rather than the chlo-ride concentration, of the standard is used for calibration. Hydrolab supplies calibration stan-dards labeled with chloride activity, rather than concentration. For instance, a de-ionized watersolution that is:

0.001410 ± 0.000003 molar in potassium chloride,0.00359 ± 0.00003 molar in potassium nitrate, with0.055% Glutaraldehyde preservative added,

has a chloride concentration of 50 mg/l, but a chloride activity of just 46.2 mg/l. For a higherchloride concentration, Hydrolab supplies a solution that is:

0.0100 ± 0.00005 molar in potassium chloride,

resulting in a 354.5 mg/l chloride concentration, and a 319.3 mg/l activity. (This solution, 0.1molar potassium chloride, is also used as a 1.413 mS conductivity calibration standard.)

The chloride sensor has a measurement range of 1 - 20,000 mg/l, with a 90% response in less thanone minute, at depths to 200 meters. All chloride sensors suffer interferences from other ions,working best when the concentrations of bromide, iodide, cyanide, silver, and sulfide ions are muchlower than the chloride ion concentration.

Benefits of using Hydrolab chloride sensor

Hydrolab chloride measurement provides these benefits:



A5-15

CHLORIDE

• range of 1 - 20,000 mg/l chloride;






A6-1

APPENDIX 6: NITRATE

123451234512345123451234512345123451234512345

11111111

121212121212121212

11111111

121212121212121212

1212121212121212

111111111

1212121212121212

111111111


o-rings

HYDROLAB NITRATE SENSOR (SIDE VIEW)


1. Maintenance

The Hydrolab nitrate sensor is an ion-specific electrode designed to measure the concentrationof nitrate ions in a solution.

! CAUTION: To avoid inaccurate nitrate readings, closely follow themaintenance and calibration procedures for pH reference,conductivity, and temperature.

The nitrate sensor is composed of a replaceable sensor made of a red plastic housing, a mem-brane, and two o-rings. This replaceable sensor fits on an adapter which plugs into themultiprobe’s nitrate sensor port.

The nitrate ion concentration (NO3-) may be displayed as milligrams per liter as nitrogen (mg/l-N) or as the direct output of the sensor in millivolts (mV).

The Hydrolab nitrate sensor requires maintenance when coated with oil, sediment, or biologi-cal growth.

red sensor body

male pin

femalesocket

replaceable sensor


A6-2

NITRATE

! WARNING: To avoid damaging the nitrate membrane, place the nitrate hy-dration cap over the sensor when using soaps, detergents, or anyactive solvents such as methanol, alcohol, or acetone to clean theother sensors. Use caution.

What do I need to service the nitrate sensor?

• Hydrolab’s MS/DS4 basic maintenance kit• Deionized water• 3% hydrogen peroxide solution• Cotton swabs

Steps to follow

STEP 1: Damp a cotton swab with the 3% hydrogen peroxide solution.

STEP 2: Thoroughly clean the tip and body of the nitrate sensor with the cotton swab.

STEP 3: Rinse the sensor with deionized water. Repeat.

Nitrate is compensated for changes in conductivity. To insure accurate nitrate readings, it isnecessary that your pH reference, temperature, and conductivity systems be properly main-tained and calibrated.

2. CalibrationNitrate calibration is a two-, three-, or four-point calibration. You can select the calibrationoption that will best suit the needs of your deployment site. If you selected the four-pointcalibration, for example, Nitrate is not calibrated until all four points are calibrated.

To prepare your instrument for Nitrate calibration, you need to add the Nitrate output in milli-volts (mV) and in milligrams per liter as Nitrogen (mg/l-N) to your display. In the Main Menu,move the cursor with the arrow keys to Setup and press ENTER. First, move the cursor toDisplay and press ENTER. Then, move the cursor to Ions-1 and press ENTER. Next, movethe cursor to NO3-:mV and press ENTER. Repeat the procedure for NO3-:mg/l-N.


A6-3

NITRATE

What do I need to calibrate for nitrate readings?

• Hydrolab’s NO3 calibration standards (Low: ref. No. 013800; High: ref. No. 013810)• Deionized water• 1 lint-free cloth• 1 nitrate sensor hydration cap• 1 calibration cup






_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A6-4

NITRATE

STEP 4: From the list of parameters, move the cursor to NO3-:mg/l-N and press ENTER.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: Parameters: Ions-1: NO3-:mg/l-N:

Cal pts (2,3,4): <<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Cal pts (2,3,4): 4<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Setup completed!

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



This first calibration option is suitable for laboratory bench work or field work. The tempera-ture should not change more than 1 ˚C from the original calibration temperature. Two calibra-tion solutions will be used to represent a high and low nitrate concentration.


A6-5

NITRATE


STEP 2: Place the calibration cup on the sensor end of the multiprobe. Pour a small amount(approximately 1/4 of an inch) of the Hydrolab low concentration nitrate standard in the cup.Place the calibration cap over the cup and shake vigorously. Discard the solution.

STEP 3: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface, with the sensors facing up. Fill thecalibration cup with the Hydrolab low concentration nitrate standard to a point just above theD.O. cell, covering the nitrate sensor. A typical reading near 145 mV is usually observed.

If after five minutes, the mV value is unstable, drifting, or more than 100 mV from the ex-pected value, follow these troubleshooting procedures:

1. The nitrate sensor and reference electrode have not thermally equilibrated. Let all yourmultiprobe components reach room or field temperature and repeat the two-point calibration.

2. The nitrate membrane has not completed hydration. Rinse the sensor with deionized water.Repeat.

3. Fill the nitrate sensor hydration cap with the Hydrolab high concentration nitrate standard.With the sensors pointing to the floor, place the cap over the nitrate sensor. Push the cap halfway over the sensor. With the sensors pointing to the ceiling, secure your multiprobe to thework surface. Push the cap all the way down. Wait for several hours and repeat STEPS 1through 3 above.

If your sensor does not respond after following the above-listed troubleshooting tips, you mayneed to replace the sensor (see “Nitrate sensor replacement” later in this chapter).





_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A6-6

NITRATE


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 6: Then, move to NO3-:mg/l-N and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 7: Since we have chosen to use the low concentration standard, type in a 2 and pressENTER to select the low concentration, room temperature point. You can also press ENTERto accept the number between brackets [1.0].

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Calibrate: Ions-1: NO3-:mg/l-N:

1: Hi-Room 2: Lo-Room: [1.0]2<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Standard: [4.613] 4.613<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________




__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A6-7

NITRATE


Now, discard the low concentration standard and let’s move to the second point of this calibra-tion procedure.

STEP 9: Pour a small amount (approximately 1/4 of an inch) of the Hydrolab high concentra-tion nitrate standard in the calibration cup. Place the calibration cap over the cup and shakevigorously. Discard the solution.

STEP 10: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface. Fill the calibration cup with theHydrolab high concentration nitrate standard to a point just above the D.O. cell, covering thenitrate sensor. The readings should be approximately 50-60 mV more negative than the lowconcentration calibration mV reading.

STEP 11: Repeat Steps 4 to 6 above.

STEP 12: Since we have chosen to use the high concentration standard, type a 1 and pressENTER to select the high concentration, room temperature point.


1: Hi-Room 2: Lo-Room: [2.0]1<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 13: You are now prompted to enter the standard. This number must represent theactivity of your calibration solution - not its concentration - and it can be found on the label ofyour Hydrolab solution.


Standard: [46.13] 46.13<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Your nitrate sensor is now calibrated.


You should also check for the following signs: ? @ N after your nitrate reading. Refer to the“Troubleshooting” section at the end of this chapter, if these signs are displayed.


A6-8

NITRATE


Repeat steps 1 through 13 of the “Two-point calibration” option. Make sure that you haveconfigured the NO3-:mg/l-N parameter for 3 calibration points. See “Choosing your calibra-tion points” at the beginning of this chapter for details.

The next steps are used to determine the isopotential point which is required to temperature-compensate the nitrate output. Follow these steps to calibrate the third point:

STEP 1: Cool your multiprobe and the high concentration solution down from 10 to 15 ˚Clower than your original room temperature calibration points.

STEP 2: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface. Fill the calibration cup with the Hydro-lab high concentration solution.

STEP 3: Once your instrument and solution have reached the required temperature, type a 3and press ENTER to select the high concentration, low temperature point.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Standard: [46.13] 46.13<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


The mV values for cold standards are usually within 30 mV of their room temperature values.


A6-9

NITRATE


Repeat steps 1 through 13 of the “Two-point calibration” option and steps 1 through 4 of the“Three-point calibration” option. Make sure that you have configured the NO3-:mg/l-N pa-rameter for 4 calibration points. See “Choosing your calibration points” at the beginning ofthis chapter for details.


STEP 1: Pour a small amount (approximately 1/4 of an inch) of the Hydrolab low concentra-tion nitrate standard in the calibration cup. Place the calibration cap over the cup and shakevigorously. Discard the solution.

STEP 2: Secure your multiprobe to the work surface. Fill the calibration cup with theHydrolab low concentration solution.

STEP 3: Let the multiprobe, filled with the low concentration solution, cool down to ±0.2 ˚Cof the high concentration at low temperature calibration point. The readings should remainapproximately 55 mV higher than the reading displayed for the high concentration at low tem-perature calibration.

STEP 4: Once your instrument and solution have reached the required temperature, type a 4and press ENTER to select the low concentration, low temperature point.



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________



Standard: [4.613] 4.613<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________




A6-10

NITRATE

3. Nitrate sensor replacementWhen calibration cannot be completed, the sensor needs to be replaced. To replace the sensor,you need to order the “Nitrate sensor replacement kit” (Ref. No. 004193) from Hydrolab. Thiskit includes a new nitrate sensor, new o-rings, and an installation wrench.

STEP 1: Rinse the sensors with tap water and dry the nitrate sensor and adapter.

STEP 2: Remove the nitrate sensor from its adapter with the installation wrench.

STEP 3: Install the o-rings on the new sensor. Insert the new sensor on the adapter andtighten until snug. To avoid breaking the sensor, do not overtighten.

STEP 4: Remove the hydration cap from the new nitrate sensor.

Proceed with the calibration steps. If the readings are still overranging, follow the hydrationprocedure described under the nitrate sensor storage section below.

4. StorageTo operate properly, the nitrate sensor requires hydration. During use, the sensor should re-main in contact with water as much as possible. Should the sensor dry out, a rehydrationperiod of 24 hours is necessary for the sensor to stabilize.

Short-term storage

STEP 1: Fill the nitrate sensor hydration cap with the Hydrolab high concentration nitratestandard.

STEP 2: With the sensors pointing to the floor, place the cap over the nitrate sensor. Push thecap half way over the sensor.



A6-11

NITRATE

Long-term storage

Should you decide to store your multiprobe for an extended period of time, be aware that longexposure of the sensor to water or even to the hydration solution will leach out the activeingredients from the sensor. Apply the following procedure to maximize your sensor’s life.

STEP 1: Thoroughly dry the nitrate sensor and the hydration cap with the lint-free cloth.

STEP 2: Place the cap over the nitrate sensor.

! CAUTION: When redeploying the sensor, a rehydration period of 24 hoursis necessary for the sensor to stabilize and be fully operational.

5. TroubleshootingThis section was designed to assist you with questions you might have about solving some ofthe common nitrate sensor problems.

If you need to clean your sensors with methanol to remove grease and other deposits, place thenitrate hydration cap over the nitrate sensor to protect it from methanol and other solvents.Clean all sensors with methanol. Rinse them with deionized water. Repeat. Remove thehydration cap before calibrating nitrate .

If you are not getting any readings from your nitrate sensor, verify if you have removed allstorage, protection, or hydration caps. These caps will corrupt or prevent readings.

If the ? sign appears after your nitrate reading, it means that you have a questionable or com-promised reading and should use fresh standard for calibration or start the calibration processover. You need to keep in mind that nitrate requires multiple calibration points. You could getquestionable readings until all points are calibrated.

If the @ sign appears after your nitrate reading, it means that your conductivity sensor has notbeen installed. You need to install this sensor.

If N/A appears in place of your nitrate reading, it means that the sensor has not been installed.You need to check your multiprobe and install the sensor.

Make sure that you have installed a nitrate sensor in the correct optional sensor expansion portof the sensor end of the multiprobe and not a sensor for another type of ion, such as ammoniumor chloride.


A6-12

NITRATE

6. Technical Hints

What is nitrate?

Nitrate, NO3-, is an ionized form of nitrogen. There are many naturally-occurring forms of

nitrogen, including the nitrogen gas that comprises nearly 80% of the atmosphere. Nitrogencompounds dissolved in water are usually classified as organic or inorganic. Soluble inorganicnitrogen compounds include ammonia, nitrite, and nitrate. Nitrate is related to ammonia in thatnitrifying bacteria convert ammonia to nitrate, which is less toxic to animal life.

How is nitrate measured?

Nitrate ion concentration is measured with a number of wet-chemistry or instrumental methods.

Nitrate ion concentration is also measured with an nitrate ion-selective electrode (ISE). Insidethe nitrate ISE is a reference electrode immersed in a solution of fixed nitrate ion concentra-tion. This solution is separated from the sample by a polymer membrane containing a chemi-cal compound that reacts, selectively, with nitrate ions. Nitrate ions on each side of the mem-brane equilibrate with the reactive compound at the inner and outer membrane surfaces. Aresult of the partitioning into the membrane surface of the nitrate ions from the internal solu-tion and the nitrate ions from the sample is a measurable electrical potential that varies with theconcentration of nitrate ions in the sample. This potential is measured with an external refer-ence electrode (which is not the same reference electrode immersed in the sealed solution), andthen scaled to nitrate ion concentration (provided the ISE has been calibrated with nitrate ioncalibration solutions).


How is nitrate measurement useful in water quality moni-toring applications?

Nitrogen is an essential nutrient for all forms of life, including all levels of aquatic organisms.Biologically-available nitrogen is found in both suspended solids and dissolved compounds innatural waters. Many natural waters are nitrogen-limited, meaning that nitrogen compoundsare the limiting nutrients. Thus even small changes in biologically-available nitrogen levelscan dramatically effect the levels of microbiological, plant, and eventually, animal life. Highlevels of accessible nitrogen, of which nitrate is one form, can lead to an over abundance ofmicroorganisms, a situation which often results in mortality to higher organisms (such as fishand shrimp) because of depleted dissolved oxygen.


A6-13

NITRATE

Applications of nitrate ion measurement include tracing the movement of point- or non-pointsource pollutants (for instance, runoff from agricultural operations), monitoring aquacultureprojects for excessive waste concentrations, and surveying nutrient levels in a natural waterbodies.

How is nitrate measurement implemented in Hydrolabinstruments?

Hydrolab uses the nitrate ISE, and the same external reference electrode used for pH measure-ment, for nitrate measurement. Because the electrical response of the nitrate ISE changes withtemperature, nitrate readings are corrected automatically for temperature effects. However,the temperature response can vary between nitrate sensors - so calibration at a second tempera-ture is needed if the temperature of the sample will be different from that of the calibrationstandards. Three- or four-point calibrations are recommended: two different standards at roomtemperature, and at least one standard at a temperature close to that expected of the samples.

The nitrate ISE response also changes with the ionic strength of the sample, since the nitrateion appears less “active” when surrounded by other ions. Hydrolab corrects for ionic strengthby measuring the conductivity of the sample water, calculating the approximate ionic strengthof the water (assuming “typical” river water ionic composition), and then adjusting the nitratereading for any difference between the ionic strengths of the calibration standards and thesample.

For example, suppose you calibrate your nitrate ISE with a solution whose nitrate concentra-tion is 5 mg/l-N, and whose conductivity (an approximation of ionic strength) is 100 µmhos.Suppose then that you made a measurement in a sample whose nitrate concentration was also5 mg/l-N, but whose conductivity was 1000 µmhos. The higher ionic strength of the samplewould cause the nitrate ion to appear less active, meaning the nitrate ISE reading would beapproximately 0.4 mg/l-N lower than the calibration standard – even though the true concen-trations are both 5 mg/l-N. The Hydrolab system largely prevents this error by measuringconductivity, calculating an approximate ionic strength, and then correcting the ISE reading.

As a result of Hydrolab’s ionic strength correction, the nitrate activity, rather than the nitrateconcentration, of the standard is used for calibration. Hydrolab supplies calibration standardslabeled with nitrate activity, rather than concentration. For instance, a de-ionized water solu-tion that is:

0.00357 ± 0.00001 molar in potassium nitrate,0.000477 ± 0.000004 molar in potassium sulfate, with0.055% glutaraldehyde preservative added,

has a nitrate concentration of 50 mg/l-N, but an nitrate activity of just 46.2 mg/l-N. For a lowernitrate concentration, Hydrolab supplies a solution that is:

0.000357 ± 0.000001 molar in potassium nitrate,


A6-14

NITRATE

0.001548 ± 0.00001 molar in potassium sulfate, with0.055% glutaraldehyde preservative added,

resulting in a 5 mg/l-N nitrate concentration, and a 4.62 mg/l-N activity.

The nitrate sensor has a measurement range of 0.1 - 50 mg/l-N (mg/l-N means mg/l of nitro-gen, present, in this case, in the nitrate form), with a 90% response in less than one minute, atdepths to 200 meters.

Leaching of chemicals from the membrane, coating of the membrane with surfactants or bio-logical growth, or damage to the membrane can lead to a decreased sensitivity of the sensor.Eventually, the sensor will no longer calibrate or operate properly. The lifetime of the sensordepends greatly on deployment conditions. The nitrate sensor will last longer in clean watersthan in severely contaminated waters.

All nitrate ISEs suffer interferences from other ions, especially chloride, bromide, bicarbonate,perchlorate, and chlorate. Even though the sensor is most selective to nitrate, other ions, whenfound in high concentrations, can dominate the sensor response. For example, concentrationsof 250 mg/l of chloride ion, 115 mg/l of bromide ion, 40 mg/l of bicarbonate, or 0.3-0.4 mg/l ofchlorate or perchorate ion all “look like” about 1 mg/l-N of nitrate ion to an nitrate ISE. Sig-nificant interferences are not likely to be encountered in water with conductivity below 1,000µS, but in sea water, which contains over 18,000 mg/l of chloride ion, a nitrate sensor wouldread over 70 mg/l-N for nitrate concentration, even in the absence of nitrate, because of thesodium interference.

Because of the chloride ion interference, the nitrate sensor performs poorly in salt water.

Benefits of using Hydrolab nitrate sensor

Hydrolab nitrate measurement provides these benefits:


• range of 0.1 - 50 mg/l-N nitrate;






A7-1

APPENDIX 7: SDI-12

1. IntroductionSDI-12 is an industry-originated, serial digital interface bus designed to allow an operator toconnect a wide variety of transducers (meteorological, hydrological, water quality, etc.) to a singledata recorder (SDI-12 Controller) with a single cable bus. This means that you could, for in-stance, connect both your Hydrolab multiprobe and a Paroscientific pressure transducer to aCampbell CR-10 data recorder and not have to worry about combinations of RS-232, parallelanalog, binary-coded decimal (BCD), serial analog, RS-422, etc., types of sensor output.

This note assumes that you are familiar with the operation of both the multiprobe and the SDI-12 Controller - called the “Controller”, e.g., Basic Data Recorder (BDR) - which will be usedwith the multiprobe.

2. A brief theory of operationWhen the Controller sends a “break signal”, your multiprobe wakens and captures the Controllercommand following the break signal. If the command is valid, your multiprobe reads its addresssetting to see whether or not its address (i.e., its name) is in fact being called, or if the address ofsome other device (at another location) is being sought. If the Controller is looking for a differentaddress, your multiprobe will “go back to sleep” until another break signal is received.

If the address being sent belongs to your multiprobe, the multiprobe will scan the instructionscoming from the Controller to see what action is required. The two most important commandsat this time are:

Measure

If your multiprobe receives the Measure command, it will report back to the Controller thenumber of parameters enabled for measurement, and the number of seconds that must passbefore the readings can be sent. The multiprobe then applies power to the multiprobe’s sensor-measuring circuits, waits for the delay period to pass, and captures all the parameter readings.The multiprobe then turns those circuits off and sends a message to the Controller that thereadings are now available for transmission.

Data

If your multiprobe receives the Data command, it will send the last parameter readings mea-sured to the Controller for storage. Parameters enabled for display in the terminal mode will bereported as SDI-12 data in the order presented on the display.

Please note that the delay in data transmission for the multiprobe is adjustable. You shouldmake sure the delay is long enough for the multiprobe to “warm-up”; this is dependent mainlyon the warm-up requirements of the D.O. parameter.


A7-2

SDI-12

3. Setting your SDI address and delayIf your instrument is equipped with SDI capability, the status line at the bottom of your screenwill show that SDI is not enabled: SDI:N/A. Once you have connected your multiprobe to yourcomputer, launched your communications program, you can enable your multiprobe’s SDIaddress via the software route by following the next steps.

SDI address

STEP 1: First, from the Main Menu, move your cursor to Setup and press ENTER.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Time Temp DO

HH:MM:SS ˚C %Sat

23:11:15 24.59 48.3

23:11:16 24.59 48.3

23:11:17 24.59 48.3

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Int Batt:12.3 Circltr:Off Logging:Off AutoLog:Off Security:2 SDI:N/A

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 2: Next, move the cursor to I/O.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A7-3

SDI-12

STEP 3: Leave the cursor on SDI:Address and press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: I/O:

SDI-Address SDI-Delay MODBUS-Address Terminal-Baud rate

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: Now, you can set your SDI address to 0-9. In this example, we have chosen 0 andpressed ENTER to validate our choice.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: I/O: SDI-Address:

Enter new SDI-12 Address (0-9, X to disable): 0<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The status line displays the change:

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Int Batt:12.3 Circltr:Off Logging:Off AutoLog:Off Security:2 SDI:0

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NOTE: Changing the SDI address from X to 0-9 will increase the standby power consumption.

If you are using your internal batteries, and want to save power, it is recommended toenable the SDI interface just before deployment.

SDI delay

The SDI delay is allows the sensors to warm-up and stabilize for accurate measurements. Youneed to set the delay, according to your needs, by following these steps:

STEP 1: Repeat Steps 1-2 on the previous page.

STEP 2: Then, move the cursor to SDI-Delay and press ENTER.


A7-4

SDI-12

elaMNIDniP9 )ecnerefer(elbaC noitcnufIDS

4 nworB stlov21+

llehs,5 dleihs,deR dnuorG

8 egnarO IDS

TABLE A4-1: SDI WIRING

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: I/O:

SDI-Address SDI-Delay MODBUS-Address Terminal-BaudRate

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: The default settings is 30 seconds, but you can choose between 5 to 994. Werecommend that you type the default value (30) unless your specific sensors need a longerwarm-up time. Finally, you can press ENTER.

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Setup: I/O: SDI-Delay:

Enter new SDI-12 Delay (5-994 seconds): 30<<

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

At this point, you can exit your communications program and disconnect your multiprobe fromyour computer. Using the SDI-12 / RS-485 / RS-422 adapter (Ref. No. 013510), you canconnect your multiprobe to the Controller and connect your multiprobe to the appropriate powersource, if needed.

From the Controller, you can send a query to the multiprobe to find out what the SDI address isand if it is the correct one for this Controller (the address choices are 0-9).

You are now ready to use your multiprobe with your Controller.

The next table will help you define the wire composition for your SDI cable and its relatedfunctions.


A8-1

APPENDIX 8: RS-422/RS-485

1. IntroductionHydrolab’s DataSonde 4 and MiniSonde can be optionally equipped with an RS-422/RS-485interface that replaces the standard RS-232/SDI-12 interface. RS-422 and RS-485 are stan-dards that specify a particular method to transmit and receive digital signals. This standard ismaintained by the Electronic Industries Association in a document titled “Standard for Electri-cal Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for Use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Sys-tems” for RS-485 and a document titled “Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage DigitalInterface Circuits” for RS-422. These standards can be purchased from:

Global Engineering Documents1990 M Street N.W.Washington, DC 20036Phone: (202)429-2860Fax: (202)331-0960

The proper nomenclature for RS-422 and RS-485 is TIA/EIA-422-B and EIA-485 respec-tively. For simplicity, the RS prefix will be used.

RS-422/RS-485 involves sending an inverted or out of phase copy of the signal simultaneouslyon a second wire. This is called a balanced transmission. Any outside electrical noise addscoherently to both signal copies. The receiver electrically subtracts the two signals to repro-duce the original signal. The advantage in the subtraction is that only the intended signal getsreproduced since they are out-of-phase. The in-phase noise on the two wires are also sub-tracted from each other to produce a net zero noise component in the reproduced signal. Thisnoise immunity allows the RS-422/RS485 interface to transmit digital signals at faster ratesover longer distances than the RS-232/SDI-12 interface. The RS-232/SDI-12 interface doesnot use balanced transmission and is therefore susceptible to noise interference which consid-erably limits the transmission distance and speed.

2. ConnectionsThe RS-422 interface uses two wires to transmit and another two wires to receive data whichallows data to be sent and received between devices simultaneously.

Transmitter

TransmitterReceiver

Receiver

4-Wire Interconnect

Device 1 Device 2

Gnd Gnd


A8-2

RS-422/RS-485

RS-485 can use two wires to both transmit and receive data. A common software protocolmust be shared between devices to prevent data collisions on the wires. RS-485 also allows formultiple transmitters and receivers to be easily connected together.

Transmitter

TransmitterReceiver

Receiver

2-Wire Interconnect

Device 1 Device 2

Gnd Gnd

Be sure to connect the signal grounds of all devices on the network together. The connectioncan be made using a conductor in the transmission cable or each device can be connected to agood earth ground. This connection keeps the common mode voltage (the voltage which thesignal must overcome to be reproduced) low. The network devices may operate without thesignal ground connection, but may not be reliable.

Most RS-485 applications require impedance termination because of fast data rates or longcables. The purpose of the termination is to prevent reflections. Reflections occur when asignal encounters a different impedance and is reflected back towards the source. This cancorrupt the intended data transmission. The most popular termination involves installing a 1/2watt resistor across the two signals lines at the receivers at each end of the network. The valueof the resistor should be equal to the characteristic impedance of the cable; typically 120 ohmsbut not less than 90 ohms.

2-Wire Interconnect

Transmitter

Receiver

Device 1

Gnd

Transmitter

Receiver

Device 2

Gnd

Alternatively, the network may be AC terminated by placing a 0.01µF capacitor in series withthe terminating resistor. The capacitor appears as a short circuit during signal transitions butappears as an open circuit to any DC loop current. This will reduce the power supply currentrequired to operate the network and still provide the proper terminating impedance.


A8-3

RS-422/RS-485

Do not add a terminating resistor to every receiver in the network. For networks with morethan about four nodes, the transmitters will be unable to drive the cable. Only terminate bothends of the main cable.

Hydrolab’s DataSonde 4 and MiniSonde equipped with an RS-422/RS-485 interface is wiredas follows:

Hydrolab offers an RS-422/RS-485 interface cable that connects to the DB9 connector on the un-derwater cable and provides wire connections for the signals. The wire connections can be used toconnect to a variety of terminal blocks and other connectors as the specific application requires.

9BDretawrednU ecafretnI584/224-SR ottcennoC

2 neerG -R

9 kcalBroeulB +T

3 wolleY -T

8 egnarO +R

4 nworB CDV21+

5 deR DNG

3. OperationTo operate an RS-422 installed DataSonde 4/MiniSonde with a PC, you will need an RS-422/RS-485 interface. A complete line of inexpensive converters that convert the RS-232 interfaceavailable on most PCs to RS-422/RS-485 is available from:

Transmitter

Receiver

DataSonde 4/MiniSonde

Gnd

+12 VDC

2

5

38

6

9

DB9 FemaleConnector

Connect pins 2 and 3together and pins 8 and 9together for RS-485

4

8

9


A8-4

RS-422/RS-485

B & B Electronics Manufacturing Company707 Dayton RoadOttawa, IL 61350Phone: (815)434-0846Fax: (815)434-7094

Telebyte Technology, Inc.270 Pulaski RoadGreenlawn, NY 11240Phone: (516)423-3232Fax: (516)385-8184

Hydrolab’s RS-422/RS-485 interface automatically senses a connection to an active network.If the network goes inactive or the cable is disconnected, then the DataSonde 4/MiniSonde willenter a low-power standby mode. During active operation, pins 3 and 9 must be externallybiased to force the interface to maintain an active connection. This can be done on the interfaceconverters by setting a jumper. Other devices may need to have resistors installed to force anactive line. Select the resistors to provide at least 200 mV across the conductor pair. Forbalance, the two resistors should be the same value. The resistors are used to pull pin 9 to a highlevel and pin 3 to a low level and yet still allow the transmitters to operate.

Hydrolab’s DataSonde 4/MiniSonde have some built-in software features to assist RS-422/RS-485 communications. The Multidrop operating mode forces the DataSonde 4/MiniSondeto exclusively use the MODBUS interface. This is an addressed query/response protocol thatcan access data and menus in the DataSonde 4/MiniSonde. The MODBUS interface operatingin Multidrop mode is required for RS-485 networked instruments.

! WARNING: To be able to switch back to the standard ANSI mode, you must havea multidrop master (such as a Surveyor 4 or a PC using Hydrolab’sProfiler software) BEFORE you switch to multidrop mode. Notethat ProComm Plus will allow you to switch to multidrop mode, butwill not allow you to switch back to ANSI mode.

Since the multidrop mode is an addressable protocol, you can change the address to which yourmultiprobe will respond.




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________



__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


A8-5

RS-422/RS-485




_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Setup:


__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 3: Then move the cursor to MODBUS-Address and press ENTER.



_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Setup: I/O:

SDI-Address SDI-Delay Modbus-Address Terminal-BaudRate Multidrop

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STEP 4: You are now asked to enter a number between 1 and 247 to select an address. Zerois reserved for the general broadcast address.

4. Cable Selection

Hydrolab’s DataSonde 4 and MiniSonde can operate at data transmission rates up to 19,200bit/sec. At this rate, cable lengths up to 4000 feet can be easily accommodated (at long lengths,a local source of power will be required). A good choice would be to use 24 AWG twisted pairtelephone cable although the power and ground connections will require a heavier gage wiresuch as 16 AWG. Twisted conductor pairs couple external noise more symmetrically than non-twisted pair conductors. This helps preserve noise rejection characteristics of the receiver.

The use of shielded cable will help prevent coupling of external noise to the network and willalso limit emissions from the network. The shield should be connected to a solid ground andgenerally only at one point on the cable to prevent DC ground loop currents from disruptingdata transmission.


A9-1

1. Field Modem InstallationAll Hydrolab multiprobes require a Hydrolab Modem Adapter to enable communications witha commercial telephone modem. The Modem Adapter provides the necessary handshakingand connections to allow a modem to properly answer the incoming call and power down themultiprobe when the call is terminated.

The Modem Adapter has a connector (labeled “modem”) that connects directly to the RS232connection of the modem. The other connector (labeled “multiprobe”) on the Modem Adapterconnects to the multiprobe using a Hydrolab interface cable (IC) and underwater cable (UW),or a calibration cable, or a detachable cable. You will also need a 25- to 9-pin adapter for thenew Hydrolab cables (Series 4 cables).

Calibrationcable or Externalpower adapter †

1212

Detachablecable ††

1212

1212

1212

121212 P

MODEM AT

multiprobe

modem

DataSonde® 4or Series 3 Sonde

Mini Sonde®

NOTES:† For the External power adapter, you

need to connect a detachable cableor a fixed cable.

†† This cable requires installation ofIBP in multiprobe.

††† See your multiprobe manual for de-tails on power options and read all as-sociated warnings.

†††

12 Volt DCpower supply

PField modem

Telephone line

Modem adapter

25- to 9-pinadapter

APPENDIX 9: USING A MODEMWITH A HYDROLAB MULTIPROBE


A9-2

USING A MODEM WITH A HYDROLAB MULTIPROBE

dnammoC noitcnuF

1C&TA noitcetedreirracelbanE

3D&TA noitcetedRTDelbanE

4K&TAFFOX/NOXelbanE

gnikahsdnah

0Q&TA gnireffubronoitcerrocrorreoN

0S&TA RSDsuounitnocecroF

0C%TA noisserpmocatadelbasiD

1=0STA gnirtsrifnorewsnA

0W&TA sgnittestnerrucevaS

The Modem Adapter does not require a power supply. However, the multiprobe and the modemwill require power (refer to chapter 1 for power options). Usually, commercial modems aresupplied with a wall-cube power supply that converts the AC mains voltage to 9 - 12 volts DC.You can use most modems with the multiprobe power supply (either internal batteries or externalbattery connected to the multiprobe with an external power adapter) by making a cable with thecorrect connector for the modem power input.

Note that the modem, Modem Adapter, power supply, and associated cabling are not water-proof, and should be installed in a watertight enclosure.

! WARNING: If AC power is used, then a GFI (ground fault interrupt) deviceshould be installed in the AC wiring to prevent electrocution.READ ALL WARNINGS IN CHAPTER 1 OF YOUR MULTI-PROBE USER’S MANUAL BEFORE USING AC POWER.

The field modem used for this application is a ZOOM® faxMODEM™ V.34PLUS and is cur-rently available at most computer retail stores in the United States. The modem should beprogrammed as follows:

The modem will automatically use this setup every time it is turned on.


A9-3


12 Volt DCpower supply

P


__________________________________________________________________________________Main Menu: Press -> or <- to move, ENTER to select...



23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48.3

23:11:15 24.59 500 13.00 0.565 48_______________

2. Office Modem InstallationThe office modem is connected to the computer serial port using a standard RS232 connection.

MODEM AT

Office modemTelephone line

dnammoC noitcnuF

1C&TA noitcetedreirracelbanE

3D&TA noitcetedRTDelbanE

4K&TA gnikahsdnahFFOX/NOXelbanE

0Q&TA gnireffubronoitcerrocrorreoN

0S&TA RSDsuounitnocecroF

0C%TA noisserpmocatadelbasiD

The modem for this application is a ZOOM® faxMODEM™ V.34PLUS and is currently avail-able at most computer retail stores in the United States. The modem should be programmed asfollows:

The modem will automatically use this setup every time it is turned on.

The computer will need a terminal emulation program to communicate with the remote multi-probe. We recommend using ProComm Plus® (V4.0) for Windows 95™ for this application.Setup the program to provide ANSI terminal emulation, 19200 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, and1 stop bit for Series 4 multiprobes. Series 3 multiprobes use a default baud rate of 1200. In anycase, the baud rate of the software must match that of the remote multiprobe. The softwareshould also be setup to provide a direct connection to the COM port connected to the modem.


A9-4


3. OperationSee if the modem is communicating with your PC by typing AT and pressing ENTER. Themodem should respond with “OK”. To access the remote site from the office, type ATD fol-lowed by the phone number; for example, ATD15122558841.

Remember to add the proper prefixes to the phone number. For example, in the United States,“9” (for office systems) or “1” (for long distance). Press ENTER. You should hear the modemdialing the phone number and then negotiating the connection. Series 4 multiprobes mayrequire as long as 15 seconds to show the start-up screen. If you don’t see the screen, send a“break” command by typing ALT+B .

Telephone line noise and delay may prevent the Series 4 multiprobe from properly determiningthe presence of an ANSI terminal. You will not be able to access a Series 4 multiprobe if alogging event is currently active. This can be avoided by setting the interval to no less than 2minutes to allow you enough time to call the modem between logging events (a logging eventoccurring during a call will not cause a problem).

When the start-up screen appears, you have complete control of the multiprobe as if you had adirect connection. ProComm Plus® for Windows 95 allows you to setup a Meta key whichautomatically sends the dialing command at the press of a key. Use the Meta key editor in theTools menu. The Meta key entry for the remote connect would be, for instance,ATD15122558841^M.

The call is terminated by “hanging-up” the modem. This is done by first typing +++ to forcethe modem back into the command mode. The modem will respond with an “OK ”. Hang-upthe modem by typing ATH0^M and pressing ENTER. The modem will terminate the call andrespond with an “OK ”. The remote modem will also hang-up and the multiprobe will power-down. You can assign a Meta key using the following entry: +++~~~ATH0^M .


NOTES


NOTES


NOTES


NOTES